LIBRARY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. 
 
 Class 
 
SAYINGS OF BUDDHA 
 
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 
 
 INDO-IRANIAN SERIES 
 
 EDITED BY 
 
 A. V. WILLIAMS JACKSON 
 
 PROFESSOR OP INDO-IRANIAN LANGUAGES 
 IN COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 
 
 VOLUME V 
 
 Neto otfc 
 
 THE COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY PRESS 
 1908 
 
 All rights reserved 
 

 SAYINGS OF BUDDHA 
 
 THE 
 
 ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 A PALI WORK OF THE BUDDHIST CANON 
 
 FOR THE FIRST TIME TRANSLATED 
 WITH AN INTRODUCTION AND NOTES 
 
 BY 
 
 JUSTIN HARTLEY MOORE, A.M., PH.D. (COLUMBIA) 
 
 INSTRUCTOR IN FRENCH IN THE COLLEGE OF THE CITY OF NEW YORK 
 
 NEW YORK 
 
 THE COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY PRESS 
 1908 
 
 All rights reserved 
 
GENERAL 
 
 Copyrighted 1908 
 By THE COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY PRESS 
 
 Set up and electrotyped. Published December, 1908 
 
 PRESS or 
 
 THE NEW ERA PRINTING COMPAN? 
 LANCASTER. PA. 
 

 TO 
 MY MOTHER 
 
 IN REVERENT MEMORY 
 
 182318 
 
PREFATORY NOTE 
 
 In this book the Sayings, or Logia, of Buddha are translated 
 for the first time into an Occidental language, and it is grati- 
 fying that Dr. Moore has accomplished the task of making them 
 generally accessible. 
 
 A. V. WILLIAMS JACKSON. 
 
 vi 
 
PREFACE 
 
 Since 1841, when Friedrich Spiegel published the first Euro- 
 pean edition of a Pali text, the interest taken in the life and 
 teachings of Buddha has been keen and marked. Through the 
 labors of Tumour, D'Alwis, Childers, Fausboll, Oldenberg, 
 Hardy, Kern, Davids, and others, steady progress has been made, 
 both in our knowledge of the career of this great Eastern teacher, 
 and in the interpretation of the sacred books of his canon. 
 
 Chief among the agencies for the publication of these texts 
 has been and still is the Pali Text Society of London, under the 
 direction of its scholarly founder and indefatigable worker, T. W. 
 Rhys Davids. Up to its twenty-fifth anniversary in April, 1907, 
 the society published, through the collaboration of many scholars, 
 a total of 46 Buddhist texts in 59 volumes, amounting in all to 
 over 17,000 octavo pages. In contrast with this great number 
 of editions of the texts themselves, the work of translating and 
 commenting upon them has not, however, made equal progress. 
 Despite the translations of Rhys Davids, Oldenberg, Weber, 
 Neumann, and others, along with the labors of many enthusiastic 
 interpreters, the gaps to be filled in translating the canon are 
 wide and many. For this reason almost any comment or argu- 
 ment on any Buddhist topic must inevitably be regarded as only 
 provisional, if not in some cases even premature, until all the 
 texts, together with their native commentaries, shall have been 
 sifted, compared, interpreted, and criticized. 
 
 There is an element of the charm of the unknown in trans- 
 lating a book that has not been previously rendered into a West- 
 ern tongue. For that reason the work of translating the Iti- 
 vuttaka has been to me a task of much interest, although the 
 undertaking was somewhat like a dive into un fathomed waters. 
 
 Before closing these prefatory remarks, I desire to express 
 my thanks for a number of obligations which I owe to friends. 
 In matters of typography and the like I have had throughout 
 the invaluable assistance of Mr. George C. O. Haas, to whom I 
 
 vii 
 
Vlll PREFACE 
 
 gladly take this occasion of expressing my sincere thanks for his 
 kindness in so generously putting at my disposal his exceptional 
 acumen in proof-reading. 
 
 My friend and fellow-student, Mr. Charles J. Ogden, of 
 Columbia University, has helped me more than once by his bril- 
 liant criticism, and Dr. Truman Michelson, among others, has 
 given me willing advice and comment. 
 
 But to one above all have I been a constant debtor throughout 
 this task, from its inception to its completion; one who has 
 played the role both of kindly guide and rigorous critic, and who 
 has most generously allotted to me a goodly portion of his time, 
 already filled to overflowing with multifarious duties. Pleasant 
 indeed has been the inspiration gained from a long association 
 with and apprenticeship under my friend and teacher, Professor 
 A. V. Williams Jackson. 
 
 JUSTIN HARTLEY MOORE. 
 
 COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY, 
 
 NEW YORK CITY. 
 
 May 18, 1908. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 PACK 
 
 PREFACE vii 
 
 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS xiii 
 
 INTRODUCTION i 
 
 TRANSLATION 
 
 1-7 Sins of Desire, Hate, Delusion, Anger, Hypocrisy, 
 
 Pride, the All 21 
 
 8-14 The preceding topics treated in a slightly differ- 
 ent way 24 
 
 15 Thirst, the fetter which causes transmigration 29 
 
 16 Perfect attention, an attribute of a novitiate-monk. . 29 
 
 17 Goodness another quality of a novitiate-monk 30 
 
 18-19 Dissension and unity in the Order 31 
 
 20 Impurity in thought and its consequences 32 
 
 21 Tranquillity of thought and its reward 34 
 
 22 Buddha's practice of virtue during his previous ex- 
 istences 35 
 
 23 Zeal in good works gains welfare now and in future. 36 
 
 24 Transmigration 37 
 
 25 Intentional falsehood 38 
 
 26 Charity, especially in giving food 38 
 
 27 The celestial character of Friendliness 39 
 
 28-29 Temptations of the senses; temperance and in- 
 temperance in eating 43 
 
 30 Sins of body, word and thought 45 
 
 31 Buddha pained or pleased by men's acts 45 
 
 3 2 ~33 Evil Character and Belief as well as upright 
 
 Character and Belief 46 
 
 34 Sloth and f rowardness as drawbacks to Supreme En- 
 lightenment 47 
 
 35-36 Chastity gains one Insight and Thorough Knowl- 
 edge 48 
 
 ix 
 
 
ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 37 A monk should be cautious and should strive for 
 
 spiritual power 49 
 
 38 Security and Solitude ; avoidance of offence to others 51 
 
 39 All sin should be loathed 52 
 
 40 Shamelessness and Hardness of Heart result from 
 
 Ignorance 53 
 
 41 Deficiency in holy wisdom leads to misfortune 54 
 
 42 Laws preventing promiscuity 55 
 
 43 Qualities of negativity 56 
 
 44 The Substrata as influencing the attainment of Nir- 
 vana 57 
 
 45 Rewards of a recluse life 58 
 
 46 Wisdom leads one to overcome Death 59 
 
 47 Various moral qualities of monks 60 
 
 48 Unchastity and causing unchastity in another 61 
 
 49 Existence and cessation of Existence 62 
 
 50 How impropriety originates 64 
 
 51 Form, absence of Form, and cessation 65 
 
 52-53 Pleasant, painful, and neutral feelings 66 
 
 54-55 Craving for virtue as well as for vice is to be 
 
 condemned 67 
 
 56-57 Taints of Lust, Existence and Ignorance 69 
 
 58 Thirst for Lust, Existence and Non-existence 70 
 
 59 Character, Contemplation, and Wisdom lead one out 
 
 of the devil's power 70 
 
 60 Charity, Character and Devotion as essentials of vir- 
 tuous deeds 71 
 
 61 The three " Eyes " proclaimed by Buddha 72 
 
 62 Knowledge and understanding lead to emancipation. 73 
 63 Comprehension of the Indestructible leads to Release 
 
 and Repose 74 
 
 64-65 Evil and good actions in body, word and thought 75 
 
 66 Purity of body, word and thought 76 
 
 67 Silence of body, word and thought 77 
 
 68 Mara's weapons are Passion, Hate and Delusion 77 
 
 69 Transmigration may be avoided by renouncing Pas- 
 sion, Hate and Ignorance 78 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS xi 
 
 70-71 Bad and good actions of body, word and thought 
 
 with their respective rewards 79 
 
 72 Deliverance from the Passions, from Form and from 
 
 the Existent 81 
 
 73 Progression from Form, through Formlessness to 
 
 Annihilation 82 
 
 74 Sons superior, equal, or inferior in virtues to their 
 
 parents 82 
 
 75 Rain-simile to inculcate charity 85 
 
 76 Character consistent with three kinds of happiness. 
 
 Good and evil companionship 87 
 
 77 Impermanence of the body and transitoriness of the 
 
 Substrata 88 
 
 78 Persons of like character associate 89 
 
 79 Social and other distractions of a monk 90 
 
 80 Gain, one's own affairs, reputation 92 
 
 8 1 One's personal affairs tend to lead one to misfortune 93 
 82 The gods talk among themselves, when a disciple goes 
 
 forth to fight the devil 94 
 
 83 Five curious portents when a god falls from Dharma 95 
 84 The three stages of novitiate, discipleship, and the 
 
 supremacy of the Teacher 97 
 
 85 Importance of attention to inhalation and exhalation 99 
 
 86 Greater and lesser laws 100 
 
 87 Lust, Malevolence, and Cruelty conduce to absence 
 
 of Nirvana. Remedy for these vices 100 
 
 88 Evil consequences of Desire, Hate and Delusion 101 
 
 89 Sins that caused the fall of Devadatta. Supremacy 
 
 of Buddha 103 
 
 90 Long list of duties. The holy eightfold path 105 
 
 91 Legend of Pindola. Self-deprivation 107 
 
 92 How to draw near to Buddha 109 
 
 93 The destruction caused by the fires of Passion, Hate 
 
 and Delusion HO 
 
 94 How to escape Birth, Old Age and Death HI 
 
 95 Various sources of Lust 112 
 
Xll ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 96 The yokes of Lust and Existence which bind one to 
 
 the world 113 
 
 97 Virtues and wisdom that improve the character 114 
 
 98 Material and spiritual phases of charity and kindliness 115 
 
 99 Transmigration and its moral lessons 115 
 
 100 Spiritual heritage from the Sanctified One 119 
 
 101 Simplicity in the daily life of a faithful follower. . . 120 
 102 Knowledge of Misery which leads to victory over 
 
 earthly ties 120 
 
 103 Further discussion of the doctrine of Misery 121 
 
 104 Glorification of monks of superior character 122 
 
 105 Thirst as a cause of transmigration 123 
 
 106 Respect shown by children to their parents 124 
 
 107 Importance of brahman householders as givers of 
 
 assistance to the Buddhist monks 125 
 
 108 Qualities that lead away from the Discipline of the 
 
 Law 125 
 
 109 Allegorical comparison of Thirst to a river 126 
 
 no Lust, Malevolence, and Cruelty as constant sources 
 
 of temptation 127 
 
 in Doctrines inculcated by the Precepts and the Sub- 
 jects of Study 129 
 
 112 Glorification of Buddha, the Consummate One 131 
 
ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 Apte, Diet. = 
 
 Bohtlingk. = 
 
 Bohtlingk and Roth. = 
 
 Childers, Pali Diet. = 
 
 Clough, Sinh. Diet. = 
 
 Dhp. = 
 
 Iti-v. = 
 
 JAOS. = 
 
 JPTS. = 
 
 JRAS. = 
 
 Monier Williams, Skt. Diet. = 
 
 Mrs. Rhys Davids, DhS. = 
 
 op. cit. 
 
 SEE. 
 
 Whitney, Skt. Gram. 
 
 ZDMG. 
 
 Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary, by 
 V. S. Apte (Poona, 1890). 
 
 Sanskrit-Worterbuch in kurzerer Fassung, 
 by Otto Bohtlingk (St. Petersburg, 
 i879). 
 
 Sanskrit-Worterbuch, by Otto Bohtlingk 
 and Rudolph Roth (St. Petersburg, 
 1855). 
 
 Dictionary of Pali Language, by R. C. 
 Childers (London, 1875). 
 
 Sinhalese-English Dictionary, by Rev. Ben- 
 jamin Clough (Colombo, 1892). 
 
 Dhammapada. 
 
 Iti-vuttaka. 
 
 Journal of the American Oriental Society. 
 
 Journal of the Pali Text Society. 
 
 Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society. 
 
 Sanskrit-English Dictionary, by Sir Monier 
 Williams (Oxford, 1899). 
 
 A Buddhist Manual of Psychological Eth- 
 ics, a translation of the Dhamma 
 Sanghani, by C. K. F. Rhys Davids 
 (London, 1900). 
 
 (opus citatum}, the work previously cited. 
 
 Sacred Books of the East. 
 
 A Sanskrit Grammar, by William Dwight 
 Whitney (Boston, 1889). 
 
 Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen 
 Gesellschaft. 
 
 For the best bibliography of general Buddhist works, see A. J.- 
 Edmunds, in Journal of the Pali Text Society, 1903, pp. 1-61. 
 
 xin 
 
HE 
 
 UNlVERSiT 
 
 OF" 
 ilr'Fl 
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 Title. The title of this translation, 'Sayings of Buddha/ is 
 a free rendering of the corresponding Pali title, Iti-vuttaka. 
 Literally these two words mean ' thus it hath been said ' and 
 refer to the fact that they claim to be the authentic Logia of 
 Buddha. This particular phrase, iti-vuttaka, is repeated again 
 and again in the course of the text, and its frequent recurrence 
 was the reason for its use as a designation of this collection of 
 Buddha's sayings. 
 
 Place in the Buddhist Canon. The Iti-vuttaka is one of the 
 canonical books of Buddhism, and is found in the second grand 
 division of the three ' baskets/ or pitakas, of which the canon 
 is composed. The second division is called the Sutta-pitaka, 
 * basket of religious instruction/ and consists of five nikayas, 
 or 'collections/ In the fifth of these latter, or the so-called 
 khuddaka-nikaya, ' collection of brief selections/ there are found 
 fifteen different works of a varied nature. In the fourth place 
 of this collection of the shorter works of the Buddhist canon 
 stands the Iti-vuttaka: included with it in this group of fif- 
 teen, be it said in passing, are the well-known Jatakas, or 
 ' Birth-Stories/ and the beautiful Buddhist anthology called the 
 Dhammapada. 
 
 Extent of the Text. In size the Iti-vuttaka is one of the 
 shortest of the Buddhist books, although it comprises 125 pages 
 in the edition by Windisch, in the Pali Text Society Publications, 
 London, 1890. This edition is the only Occidental one, and it 
 furnishes the text on which this translation is based. In this 
 admirable work of Windisch, only about two thirds of each 
 page is taken up by the text proper, the other third being taken 
 up by the editor's summary of the variant readings. 
 
 Arrangement of the Iti-vuttaka. The entire work is divided 
 into one hundred and twelve sections, each partly in prose and 
 
 2 I 
 
2 IT1-VUTTAKA 
 
 partly in verse. There is also a further arrangement into parts, 
 nipatas, which are, in their turn, subdivided into chapters, vaggas. 
 As this latter arrangement is of no practical service to the modern 
 reader, I have for the most part ignored it, merely including 
 in the translation the headings of these so-called parts and divi- 
 sions. When a reference is made, therefore, to a word in any 
 portion of the book, I have given the section number, and to indi- 
 cate the line in which the particular word occurs, I have ap- 
 pended a figure, I, 2, 3, etc., if the word be in the prose portion 
 of the section, or have affixed a small letter, a, b, c, etc., if the 
 word be in the poetical part of the section. 
 
 Age and Authorship. The date of the Iti-vuttaka is a matter 
 of extreme uncertainty. According to native tradition, the entire 
 Buddhist canon was settled definitely at the first great convention 
 at Rajagaha, shortly after the death of Buddha. No less an 
 authority than the famous Buddhaghosa repeats this statement 
 in his introduction to the Sumangala Vilasini, his commentary on 
 the Digha Nikaya. The twenty-five pages of his introduction, 
 of which I have a translation under way, give an account of the 
 composition of the whole Buddhist canon. But it must be re- 
 membered that Buddhaghosa lived toward the end of the fourth 
 century A. D., and his views may have to be taken with some 
 qualification, as the progress of our knowledge continues to throw 
 more light into the murky darkness of Buddhist chronology. 
 
 The authorship of the Iti-vuttaka, both prose and poetical por- 
 tions, is attributed to the Blessed One, Buddha, and his teachings 
 are reported to have been heard and afterwards written down 
 by one of his disciples. The disciple keeps himself anonymous, 
 and contents himself with saying merely: 'This verily was said 
 by the Blessed One, said by the Sanctified One, so I have heard/ 
 There is nothing to disprove the authenticity of the stanzas in 
 the Iti-vuttaka as Buddha's own sayings ; some scholars may be 
 inclined to hold, as some have already held about those in the 
 Jatakas and elsewhere, that the moral teachings in this work 
 may have been current in India long before Buddha's time, and 
 may have been adapted and changed by him to suit his own 
 
INTRODUCTION 3 
 
 purposes. But it seems doubtful to me that the prose portions 
 of the Iti-vuttaka came originally from Buddha's mouth, although 
 others may hold a different opinion. In many cases, as will be 
 noted more particularly (see p. 9), the prose portions bear 
 all the ear-marks of a short commentary on the succeeding 
 verses; these prose portions our anonymous redactor may have 
 written himself, or they may have been done previously by another 
 and thus lay ready to his hand when the redactor undertook his 
 compilation. At best their authorship seems highly uncertain. 
 
 Subject Matter. A glance at the table of contents which I 
 have prefixed to the volume shows the Iti-vuttaka to be a 
 collection of ethical teachings of Buddha, on a wide range of 
 moral subjects. Passion, Anger, Pride, Lust, and other short- 
 comings of body, word, and thought, are inveighed against or 
 deprecated. Friendliness, Charity, Virtue, Modesty, and Truth 
 are among the good qualities which the Master inculcates. Sev- 
 eral characteristic Buddhist doctrines, the technical terms for 
 which are hard to translate adequately, are dwelt upon; among 
 them are Nirvana, the Aggregates, the Substrata, Previous Ex- 
 istence, and Supreme Enlightenment. 
 
 It is to be noted that Buddha's rules and commands and dicta 
 are seldom directed to mankind in general, but are usually ad- 
 dressed to his bhikkhus, his ' monks, mendicants, members of his 
 order/ as the word may be translated. The bhikkhunl, or l female 
 devotee, nun/ is only once mentioned in the course of the work 
 ( 69)- Sinners have the terrors of perdition preached to them 
 to deter them from misdoing; to the virtuous there is promised 
 Deliverance and escape from this imprisoning body, as a reward 
 for their good deeds. Seldom is the didactic tone of the work 
 broken by matters of a different tenor; yet, here and there, 
 a changing note is heard. This point is well illustrated in the 
 curious passage about the crossing of species in 42, and in 
 another way in 107, by a portrayal of the attitude of the Bud- 
 dhists toward the brahman householders, to whom they owed 
 their sustenance. Occasional metaphors or similes add a pleas- 
 ing touch to the style, as will be noted more particularly below. 
 
4 ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 Proper Names in the Text. Buddha is mentioned many times 
 and under many titles. The word * Buddha ' itself is a title 
 meaning the * Enlightened One, the Wise One/ and it is to be 
 noted that the great reformer's true name, Gotama, never occurs 
 in the course of this book. Among his other appellatives are 
 found the epithets of the 'Blessed One/ the 'Sanctified One/ 
 the 'Consummate One/ the 'Great Sage/ the 'Master/ the 
 'Teacher/ and others. His cousin and arch-enemy, Devadatta, 
 is once referred to (8911). Mara, or Satan the tempter, is 
 named no less than five times (58, 68, 82, 83, 93). I have 
 noticed only a single geographical name, the reference being to 
 'Vulture-Peak/ a mountain in the Magadha country (24). 
 
 The Uddanas. Scattered at varying intervals throughout the 
 course of the text are found brief metrical resumes, in the Pali 
 language, of the particular sections that precede each. The word 
 udddna has the same spelling in Sanskrit as in Pali, and means, 
 literally, 'binding together, fastening/ and secondarily, 'table of 
 contents, summary, resume/ Although Monier- Williams in his 
 Sanskrit Dictionary notes the fact that the native lexicographers 
 assign this secondary meaning to the word in Sanskrit, there 
 is no actual citation of its occurrence in any Sanskrit text. In 
 Pali, however, the meaning ' summary/ or ' resume ' is common, 
 and the word uddana is found in other books of the Buddhist 
 canon, for example in the Sutta-Pitaka. In the Iti-vuttaka there 
 are eleven of these resumes. Eight of them sum up, or reca- 
 pitulate very briefly, the ten sections of the work immediately 
 preceding each; one resume sums up seven preceding sections, 
 another sums up thirteen sections, and still another refers to 
 twenty-two sections immediately before it. This latter resume, 
 however, is in part a repetition of the one preceding, and we may 
 note incidentally that this repeated portion shows wide variation 
 in wording from the same matter in the previous resume. The 
 fact that the resumes in eight instances give a recapitulation of 
 the series of ten sections preceding is not significant of anything 
 especial; this choice of ten sections is, in my opinion, purely 
 a mechanical arrangement and does not indicate that the ten in 
 
INTRODUCTION 5 
 
 question have any particular interconnection. This opinion is 
 plainly borne out by the fact that the second uddana happens 
 to fall between two sections (20 and 21) closely related in 
 subject matter, style, and treatment. 
 
 The form of the uddanas, as already stated, is metrical, although 
 the versification is but a sorry affair in spite of the efforts made 
 to attain it. The native redactor's method of procedure was to 
 take some salient or important word or words from each section, 
 and to arrange in metrical form the various words thus obtained. 
 In order to satisfy the requirements of the meter, he has been 
 obliged to resort to various makeshifts and expedients. Some- 
 times a word is given in its stem form, and sometimes in the nom- 
 inative case, according as the final syllable of the word in ques- 
 tion is required by the meter to be light or heavy; sometimes, 
 in order to fill in an extra syllable or two that may be exacted 
 by the meter, a word is given in some case other than the nom- 
 inative. For these latter instances see Uddana 5. 4, 7, 8; 6. 3; 
 9. 4; ii. 4. Singulars instead of the plurals in the text passages 
 are used, and vice versa. Worse than this, the redactor frequently 
 not only does not give a word from the text at all, but even 
 goes to the extent of substituting a word or expression of his 
 own. This latter procedure may, and often does, meet the situ- 
 ation demanded by the meter, but, to me at least, seems to vitiate 
 the value of these resumes. Another drawback, and again a 
 serious one, to the value of the uddanas, is the fact that a certain 
 word chosen to sum up, or recapitulate, a section, is a word 
 which is neither salient nor important, but on the contrary, is 
 quite subordinate in the section thus summarized. This again 
 offers, in my opinion, a proof of the lack of value which the 
 resumes have for any purpose whatsoever. Compare, for ex- 
 ample, Uddana 2. 2; 3. I, 2; 4. I, 2, 4; 5. 3; 7. 2; 9. 3; 10. 2, 3; 
 ii. 2, 4. It is to be noted, furthermore, that all the uddanas refer 
 back to the prose portions, and when, therefore, the prose and the 
 poetical portions of a section are different in subject matter, as 
 happens occasionally, the verse portion is not touched upon at 
 all in the resume. 
 
6 ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 As regards the meter in which the uddanas are written, it is 
 found that ten are composed in the sloka meter, but a sloka of 
 a highly irregular character, having, as it often does, verses with 
 more than eight syllables. So irregular, in fact, are the verses 
 of the uddanas, and so manifestly artificial is their character, 
 that I have not included them in my metrical analysis of the 
 work. As regards the sixth uddana, the only one which is not 
 written in the sloka meter, we are tempted to assume different 
 authorship; this sixth resume is written in a regular tristubh 
 meter, with four verses of eleven syllables each, and all the feet 
 of each one of the four lines are normal. It is to be noted 
 further that this resume is the most accurate of the eleven in 
 the book. 
 
 In general we may say of the resumes that they are merely 
 jingles of little utility and less precision, abounding in errors of 
 many kinds, loose in execution, and, in short, extremely ineffectual. 
 
 Connection between the Sections. Although, as said before, 
 the Iti-vuttaka is a collection of short disquisitions on widely 
 different moral subjects, there nevertheless does exist in many 
 parts of the work an apparent sequence in the contents and 
 subject matter of the different stanzas. The most common rela- 
 tionship between such interdependent stanzas is one of contrast 
 contrast between that which is good and that which is bad, 
 between temperance and intemperance, between a moral man and 
 an immoral man. Examples of such contrasting stanzas are 
 found in 20 and 21, 28 and 29, 32 and 33, 54 and 55, 56 and 
 57, 64 and 65, 70 and 71. A noticeable fact in these contrasts 
 between good and bad, is that the evil attribute always has the 
 first place, while the good attribute has the second. Other kinds 
 of inter-sectional relationship besides this one of contrast, are to 
 be found. At the opening of the book, the first six stanzas are 
 all practically identical, save for the use in each of a different 
 word for a different sin. Except for this single word, the six 
 stanzas are absolutely alike. The series is summed up in a section 
 of similar character (7), which epitomizes the preceding six 
 in the word sab ba, ' the All/ Exactly the same series is again re- 
 
INTRODUCTION J 
 
 peated without the least variation in 9-13, but there the corre- 
 sponding prose introductions are different from those in the group 
 preceding. Another shorter group of stanzas similar to each other 
 in content is found in 52-56, where the first, third, and fifth 
 stanzas of the group are identical, except for the varying cardinal 
 words, like vedana, ' feelings/ esana, ' cravings/ and asava, 
 ' taints/ In other parts of the work sundry less extensive parallel 
 and similar phrases and expressions are to be noticed, but in 
 these latter cases, the inter-stanza relationship is not so pro- 
 nounced as in the examples just cited. 
 
 Repetition of Passages. Not only are a few sections couched 
 in phraseology that is nearly identical, but downright repetitions 
 as well are found. It is to be remarked that these repeated 
 passages are not contiguous or even near to each other, but are 
 widely separated. For example, 15 a-h= 105 a-h; 22 a-h = 6o 
 a-h; 35 e-j=36 e-j ; 38 h-i = 46 c-d; 48 i-l = 9i e-h; 51 
 a-j = ;6 g~ n ; 53 e-h = 72 e-h = 85 e-h; 68 a-b = 69 a-b; 86 
 e-f no a-b; 93 w~b' = 95 k-p. All these citations are taken 
 from the verse portions. A few examples from the prose parts 
 of the work might also be included, but they are passed over 
 as being of minor importance. In my opinion, the fact 
 that these repeated passages occur at such wide intervals in the 
 composition strengthens the view already advanced, that the Iti- 
 vuttaka is not a continuous work, but is rather a compilation, an 
 arrangement of material previously composed, at some time not 
 known to us. 
 
 Construction. It has already been stated that each of the 112 
 sections of the Iti-vuttaka consists roughly of two equal portions 
 of prose and verse. For purposes of convenience we may ex- 
 amine these two parts separately, and we shall find this procedure 
 of great advantage, as the treatment of each must necessarily be 
 different. 
 
 Prose. In judging of the style of a literary composition, 
 we must not merely examine and study the form, but we should 
 also give appropriate attention to the subject matter, the question 
 of the author's purpose, and the influence of contemporary and 
 
8 ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 previous literary works. Thus, in estimating the Iti-vuttaka, we 
 must remember that the purpose of the prose portions is to in- 
 troduce and amplify, to explain and expound the moral stanzas 
 which follow. As these stanzas contain practically no mytho- 
 logical, historical, biographical, or narrative passages, and as their 
 prose introductions adhere in general very closely to the subject 
 matter, we do not find in the prose divisions, for example, the 
 charming folk-lore of the Jatakas, the vivid images of jewels, 
 trees, mountain, and flowing river of the Jinalarikara, the fasci- 
 nating devil stories of the Sarhyutta Nikaya (cf. Warren, Bud- 
 dhism, p. 426). Furthermore, the religious teachings of the Iti- 
 vuttaka are not seasoned with the piquant, homely details and 
 incidents of daily life, as are the doctrines of the Digha Nikaya. 
 On the contrary there is in the present work a marked and close 
 adherence to the main subject matter, so much so that one wel- 
 comes such a description as that of the sharks and demons in 
 69 as a pungent example of Buddhist folk-lore. The prose 
 style is, in general, bald, abrupt, inelegant. It is matter-of-fact 
 and long-winded; it abounds in repetitions. The repetitions are 
 both of phrase and formula, and it is of the latter that we shall 
 speak first. 
 
 Formulas. At the opening of every prose portion of the Iti- 
 vuttaka, with the exception of 81-98, and 101-111, which will 
 be discussed later, there is the formal sentence ' This verily 
 was said by the Blessed One, said by the Sanctified One, so I 
 have heard/ and at the close of each a second formula ' To this 
 effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the following.' 
 This second formula refers to the poetical portion which imme- 
 diately follows. At the end of the poetical portion there is ad- 
 joined a third formula ' Exactly to that effect was it spoken by 
 the Blessed One, so I have heard/ These formulas indicate 
 clearly the Buddhistic view, that not only the verse, but also the 
 prose comes actually from Buddha's own lips. As indicated 
 above, however, the prose portions were probably not spoken 
 by Buddha at all, but are, it is likely, later than his time, and 
 are a commentary on the Teacher's sayings in verse. 
 
INTRODUCTION 9 
 
 Dialogue Form. A conversational turn is given to the prose 
 by the incessant repetition of the vocative bhikkhave, i O monks/ 
 The use of this word may be thought possibly to give an esoteric 
 coloring to the teachings. In most of the sections, the dialogue 
 form is further emphasized by direct questions, for example in 
 the opening sentence of 54 : ' There are these three Cravings, 
 O monks/ ' What three ? ' * The Craving for Lust, the Craving 
 for ... / etc. 
 
 Repetition. Besides the repetition of a formula, there is also 
 found, especially in the latter half of the work, a considerable, 
 and sometimes rather tiresome, reiteration of phrases and sen- 
 tences. This fact is of course no new thing in a Buddhist book, 
 and the general view is that such repetitions were for pedagogic 
 purposes. Without entering on the difficult problem as to how 
 long Buddhistic doctrines were handed down by oral tradition, 
 it is certain that oral tradition did at one time prevail, and that in 
 the Iti-vuttaka, as in other canonical works, the frequent repeti- 
 tion was for mnemonic or didactic reasons. 
 
 Relation between the Prose and the Verse. The most casual 
 perusal of the Iti-vuttaka confirms, it seems to me, the statement 
 made above that the prose portions of the 112 sections are dis- 
 guised commentaries on the metrical portions of these 112 sec- 
 tions. In 1 8, for example, the verse says ' One that doth 
 disturb the Order is tormented for an aeon in perdition/ The 
 prose portion says on the same topic ' There is one thing, O 
 monks, which, in coming into being, ariseth to the disadvantage 
 and unhappiness of many people, to the detriment, disadvantage, 
 and misery of many people, gods as well as men/ 'What is 
 this one thing? ' ' It is dissension in the Order. For in an Order 
 that hath been divided, there are reciprocal quarrels as well as 
 reciprocal abuse, reciprocal disagreement and desertion, and there 
 (in such an Order) they are discontented and enjoy no content- 
 ment, and there is diversity of opinion (even) among those who 
 are content/ Many similar examples might be adduced as illus- 
 trations of the point. Even more decisive evidence is at hand, 
 it seems to me, in 109. This section contains an allegorical 
 
IO ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 passage about the Flood of Passion, with an enumeration of the 
 dangers of the Flood. The prose takes up the different alle- 
 gorical details, and proceeds to elucidate them as follows : ' " Flood 
 of the river " is the designation of Thirst ; " pleasant and delight- 
 ful in aspect " is allegorically the designation of private dwellings ; 
 "a pool below" is the designation of the five Bonds of sensual 
 life ; " with waves " is the designation of the frenzy of anger ; 
 "with whirlpools" is the designation of the five varieties of 
 Lust ; " with crocodiles and demons " is the designation of woman- 
 kind; "against the flood" is the designation of Separation; 
 "struggling with hands and feet" is the designation of the 
 exertion of one's strength ; " the spectator standing on the shore " 
 is the designation of the Consummate One, the Sanctified One, 
 the Perfectly Enlightened One/ Occasionally when the stanza 
 is difficult of comprehension, or involved in impenetrable subtlety, 
 the writer of the introductory prose adroitly crawls out of the 
 difficulty and cleverly conceals his own miscomprehension of the 
 verses, either by giving the baldest, broadest possible outlines of 
 the verse, or by summing up the meaning in an ambiguous 
 word or phrase. The latter point is best illustrated by 63, 
 which, in my judgment, is the most difficult section of the whole 
 book. A fuller treatment of this subject will be given in the 
 course of the translation, in the notes on the various sections. 
 
 Another possible confirmation of this view as to the prose 
 of the Iti-vuttaka, may be found in the more or less independent 
 subject matter included in it for the purpose of filling out and 
 amplifying the stanzas that follow. Although we hold to the 
 above opinion as to the prose, it is by no means our intention to 
 belittle its general value or its general interest. On the contrary 
 the prose, although not so interesting as the verse, contains much 
 that is of deep philosophical import, and its ethical dicta, although 
 perhaps somewhat lacking in rhetorical polish, are lofty and noble 
 in the extreme. 
 
 Poetry. Before discussing the style and substance of the 
 stanzas, it would be expedient to give here a full discussion of 
 their form, that is of the meters in which they are composed. 
 
INTRODUCTION 1 1 
 
 But owing to the length and somewhat technical character of 
 this metrical analysis, it seems unnecessary to include such a 
 discussion, of interest only to the specialist, within the confines 
 of this more or less general introduction. The metrical analysis 
 of the Iti-vuttaka will be found in the Journal of the American 
 Oriental Society, New Haven, Conn., vol. 28, pp. 317-330. In 
 that article I have classified the various types of meter found in 
 the Iti-vuttaka, and have arranged statistical tables. I have also 
 made a comparison with Vedic meters and likewise with those 
 of Epic poetry in Sanskrit. 
 
 Style. Turning to the style of the stanzas in the book, we 
 may appropriately devote a word of praise to their general sim- 
 plicity. Hardly any trace is found of the artificial diction oc- 
 casionally present in other Pali works, for example, in the pro- 
 fessedly rhetorical- Jinalarikara of Buddharakkhita (edited and 
 translated by James Gray, London, 1894), where we find (p. 10) 
 the reversible line namo tassa yato mahimato yassa tamo na, which 
 Gray renders: 'Honor to him (Buddha), inasmuch as to him, 
 deserving of honor, no darkness is/ No such artificialities are 
 found in the Iti-vuttaka ; there is likewise a total lack of internal 
 rhyme, and also of the so-called paragrammatic echoing rhymes. 
 Occasional instances of paronomasia are to be found, for example 
 in 90, a passage of some interest, owing to the play on the word 
 agga, l chief, top/ a term repeated eleven times in the course of 
 the stanzas. 
 
 Figures of Speech. Great assistance was obtained in making 
 an examination of the rhetorical make-up of the Iti-vuttaka, from 
 an opportune article by Mrs. Rhys Davids, entitled ' Similes in 
 the Nikayas/ in the Journal of the Pali Text Society, London, 
 1906-7. The article consists of a painstaking list in Pali of 
 similes in the whole range of books composing the Sutta-pitaka, 
 and it offers evidence of the most diligent toil. 
 
 In general the use of figures of speech in the Iti-vuttaka, 
 while not sparing, is hardly abundant, there being a round fifty 
 in the work. Although a few rather striking similes and meta- 
 phors are found, they are as a rule not especially vivid. We 
 
12 ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 may conveniently divide the figures of speech into (a) those 
 drawn from the realm of nature; (b) those from animals and their 
 actions, and (c) those from man and his relations in daily life. 
 
 (a) Among the most common figures of speech are similes 
 based upon some natural phenomenon, the element of water play- 
 ing an important part. This prominence of similes drawn from 
 water is due to the frequent occurrence of the Buddhistic image 
 that the righteous man is he that crosses (tarati) beyond, or to 
 the other side (para) of the Flood (ogha) of Passion and Lust. 
 The latter word, ogha, occurs but once ( 107) in the course of 
 the work, but the idea of crossing over it, taranam, to the other 
 shore, is quite frequent, as it occurs a dozen of times. Another 
 more common word for the same idea is sammudha, 'ocean/ in 
 the expression ' he crosseth the ocean . . . difficult to traverse ' 
 ( 69 c). The impulse of Passion or Desire is compared to a 
 river (nadl) of rapid current (sota), with many a treacherous 
 whirlpool (avatta) to catch the helpless struggler (see 109). 
 Different from this is the figure of the River of Subsistence 
 (ahara-netti) in 43. The drop of water (uda-bindu, 88 !) and 
 the pool (rdhada, 92 i) are other forms of aqueous metaphors. 
 
 Almost as frequent as the water comparisons are the various 
 similes and metaphors based upon light. The sun and moon are 
 naturally foremost among the more concrete images, and each is 
 mentioned twice in the work (59d, 88 a' and 27, 74 i, re- 
 spectively). In the first moon-passage, we find mention also of 
 the morning-star, osadhi-taraka. Luminous terms in comparisons 
 are many; to the general word for light, pabha (27, 104), 
 must be added pajjota, 'brightness' (104), obhasa, 'radiance/ 
 aloka, 'splendor.' The monks must be 'torch-bearers' for the 
 laymen who are in darkness. To the same category of images 
 from the realm of light, belongs the passage on the ' funeral- 
 torch' (91) which illumines the village dunghill. Contrasting 
 with these words, is the threefold occurrence of the idea of ' dark- 
 ness ' in 14 f, 38 e, 47 h. 
 
 Two other nature-images of a different kind are the vivid de- 
 scription of the bursting of a rain-cloud, with its resultant inun- 
 
INTRODUCTION 1 3 
 
 dation (75 o), and the eloquent stanzas in 24 with their simile 
 of the lofty mountain of Vulture Peak. 
 
 (b) Turning next to the animal similes, we find that animal 
 imagery is rare. The lion, slha ( 112), the fish, maccha 
 (76), and the shark or crocodile, gaha (69, 109), alone 
 are mentioned in comparisons; we might, however, include with 
 them the rakkhasas, or 'demons' (69) which inhabit the ocean. 
 An animal likeness is perhaps also to be discerned in the epithet 
 singi, l horned/ that is applied to a sinning monk in 108. 
 
 (c) Much richer than the animal category, is the third class 
 of similes and metaphors, namely, those derived from man and 
 his relations in daily life. An interesting paragraph, probably 
 to be taken allegorically, is found in 74, where there occurs a 
 description of children who are superior or equal or inferior to 
 their parents. A prototype of Bunyan's hero, Christian, casting 
 off his load, occurs in 44, where the Sanctified monk is said 
 to have Maid his burden aside/ In 68, we hear the words of 
 an Oriental psalmist, as it were, in the scathing epithet applied 
 to erring sinners who are called in biting phrase ' Bond of Mara, 
 ye snare of Mara (i. e. the Devil)/ A fine image occurs in 
 28, 29, where the monks are exhorted to keep the ' doors ' 
 to their senses closely guarded. The 'door' is used again in 
 personification in 84 where the Great Sage and his faithful 
 followers are said to disclose the ' door of Immortality (dvaram 
 amatassa) / 
 
 Among other objects of every-day life which are used figura- 
 tively, may be mentioned the arrow (sara) that imparts to its 
 quiver (kalapa) the poison with which it is smeared (76). 
 Further the javelin (salla) is used symbolically of pain or suffer- 
 ing (53). Various other comparisons, drawn this time from 
 the vegetable realm, are of less importance; such for example 
 is the figurative use of mftla, ' root ' ( 42 c), tasa-sara, ' of excel- 
 lent bark/ i. e. the bamboo (56), and tala-pakka, 'the ripe 
 Tal fruit, or Palmyra (88x). Finally we may refer to two 
 epithets applied to the Master, Buddha, one where he is called 
 the ' charioteer/ and the other, an interesting phrase found 
 
14 ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 in ioo, where he calls himself ' the brahman ... a healer, 
 or physician, who is a " causer of pain," sallakatta.' 
 
 Synonyms and Titles of Buddha. Reference has already been 
 made (p. 4) to the use in the Iti-vuttaka of many titles and ap- 
 pelatives given to Gotama. Although one would of course pre- 
 suppose a use of such epithets in the course of the prose portions 
 of the work, we would hardly expect to find them in the verses, 
 which are professed to be the Master's own words to his dis- 
 ciples. He is spoken of impersonally in the verses as Buddha, 
 ' the Enlightened One ' ( 21 d, 35 h, 36 h, 52 b, 54 b, 56 b, 68 e, 
 90 c, 112 i, m) ; as Tathdgata Buddha, ' the Consummate, Enlight- 
 ened One ' ( 38 a, 39 a) ; as Tathagata alone, ' the Consummate 
 One' (89J, u) ; as Sammasambudha, 'the Perfectly Enlight- 
 ened One* (511, 73 m )- Occasionally other adjectives are 
 employed, such as, for example, Bhagavan, ' the Blessed One ' 
 (35c, 360, 98 b), Mahesi, the 'Great Sage' (24d, 26 b, 
 35 f , 36 f , 84 a) , and also Parisuttama, ' the Excellent One ' 
 ( 61 d). This inclusion of the word Buddha or other titles for 
 Gotama within the stanzas themselves neither proves nor dis- 
 proves his authorship of them. 
 
 Use of Internal Quotations. In further connection with this 
 whole question of quotation, that is to say, of citation of formulas 
 within the stanzas, which attest Buddha as the author, we may 
 note the fact that in one stanza (6"9h) the Master's words are 
 given direct, \with the added words iti brumi, 'so I say, so I 
 declare/ within the stanza itself. This direct discourse is also 
 found several times in the Dhammapada, compare, for example, 
 verses 409-414 and many others. Redundant quotes of an indi- 
 rect character, that is to say in the third person, are found in 
 the following verses : yatha vuttam mahesina, ' so was it said 
 by the Great Sage ' ( 26 b), and akkasi parisuttamo, ' the Excel- 
 lent One hath proclaimed' (61 d). In my opinion these lines 
 were introduced into the stanzas by the compiler of the Iti-vut- 
 taka, in order to fill the metrical requirements to give the stanzas 
 the proper number of verses. That is, it seems probable that the 
 compiler took from some earlier work, whether an oral or a writ- 
 
INTRODUCTION 1 5 
 
 ten one, it is not known, a certain number of verses ; in order to 
 have of these verses the number requisite to make a complete 
 group, or stanza, he added in the stanza such superfluous state- 
 ments of Buddha's authorship. Additional confirmation of this 
 view is to be found, it seems to me, in the words ti me sutam, 
 ' so I have heard/ introduced into verse h of 89. 
 
 Stanzas not addressed to the Laity. Although the poetical por- 
 tion of the Iti-vuttaka is far from being so didactic as the prose 
 that paraphrases it, nevertheless in the stanzas themselves the 
 didactic element is well marked. The appeal of this collection 
 of Buddha's teachings was not addressed to the laity in general, 
 for, as remarked above, they were directed to his bhikkhus, the 
 Brethren of the Buddhist Order. Although the term bhikkhu, 
 'monk,' does not occur in the stanzas with the same tiresome 
 frequency with which it is reiterated in the prose, yet the word 
 is found no less than thirty times within the verses of this book. 
 This frequent occurrence of the word 'monk' deserves some 
 emphasis, in order to point out forcibly that Buddha's teaching, 
 as set forth in the Iti-vuttaka, was distinctly not a world-teaching, 
 a wide, universal exhortation of mankind to higher ideals, but 
 was, on the contrary, confined to a comparatively narrow circle 
 of monastic followers. 
 
 Inter-canonical Quotation. The view has been more than once 
 advanced in this essay that the Iti-vuttaka is probably a compila- 
 tion from various works of the Pali canon ; if this view be right, 
 the date of the compilation of the Iti-vuttaka must of course be 
 later than the composition of the other Buddhistic works from 
 which it is derived. Although this view may be substantiated in 
 several ways from internal evidence, it cannot, unfortunately, be 
 definitely proved until a complete concordance of all the canonical 
 works (some of which have not yet even been edited), has been 
 made. While preparing this translation, I made a beginning 
 of such a concordance, or cross-reference work, commencing with 
 the Jatakas, and had collected a large number of index slips, when 
 I learned that Professor R. O. Franke, of Konigsberg, was 
 already at work upon a complete first-line index of the Pali 
 
1 6 ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 canon, which is to be published in the Harvard Oriental Series. 
 Accordingly I abandoned the task so as to avoid a duplication 
 of the work. It is not possible, therefore, to settle the 
 interesting question of inter-canonical quotation until Dr. Franke's 
 valuable concordance is completed. A few such cross-references, 
 however, may be made, to show the possibility of further develop- 
 ments in this line. The Iti-vuttaka, for instance, has four pas- 
 sages in common with the Dhammapada, a work which is itself 
 a compilation, or anthology. Thus Iti-v., 25 a-d, and 48 a-1, 
 are identical with Dhp., vs. 176, 306-8. Not only are these four 
 verses common to the two works, but many intangible likenesses 
 in style, in expression, and in phrasing are to be observed. Several 
 rather brief identical passages are to be found in the Samyutta 
 Nikaya (edited by Peer, PTS. f London, 1884-1904), and these 
 are noted by Windisch in the critical notes to his edition. Many 
 long passages in the latter sections of the Iti-vuttaka, he observes, 
 are repeated, verbatim, in the Anguttara Nikaya. This coinci- 
 dence, when taken together with the different character generally 
 of the latter part of the Iti-vuttaka, and also in connection with 
 the fact that so many of the latter sections are not to be found in 
 the Chinese translation of the work by Yuan Chwang (Hiian 
 Tsang) (see Watanabe, Chinese Collection of Iti-vuttakas, in 
 JPTS., London, 1907, pp. 44-49), seems, in my opinion, to show 
 that many of the latter sections of this book are of later intro- 
 duction as compared with the former portions. 
 
 Grammar. In the course of this translation there are given in 
 the notes a number of interesting grammatical points presented 
 by the language of the Iti-vuttaka, both in respect to inflection 
 and syntax. Although a discussion of such matters would natu- 
 rally be out of place here, we may briefly outline a few of the 
 more important questions. In inflection there occur several 
 archaic plurals, which we may term Vedic plurals, and which are 
 occasionally found elsewhere in Pali. Thus luddhase, dutthase, 
 mulhase, kuddhase, makkhase, mattase in the first six sections, in 
 place of the more usual forms luddha, duttha, mulha, etc. One 
 instance of the use of a dative case as an infinitive is worth 
 
INTRODUCTION I/ 
 
 noting (see 86, note i). There are two examples of the 
 exceedingly rare conditional mood, agamissa (42. 7), and 
 abhavissa (43. 3). In syntax we may note the very 
 common use of the gerund and gerundive, particularly of the 
 former. The gerund ending -tvana, corresponding to the Vedic 
 -tvanam occurs nine times. The use of the aorist as an indefinite 
 past tense is very common, occurring on every page of the book. 
 The syntax of the stanzas is usually quite simple, but occasional 
 inversions and omissions of verbs are found, and these instances 
 will be found treated in the notes. The style is somewhat marred 
 by the frequent use of the indefinite relative clause, and this 
 slight stylistic blemish, or mannerism, is but too manifest, I fear, 
 in the translation. 
 
 Vocabulary. The choice of words in the Iti-vuttaka is natu- 
 rally dependent on the subject matter, and is to be expected 
 that the words should be largely religious terms. The work is 
 rich in categorical moral terms, with their opposites, such as 
 Friendliness, Charity, Virtue, Lust, Hate, Sloth, and many others. 
 In rendering these words into English a translator is beset with 
 a task of some difficulty. The various European translators of 
 Buddhistic works show great lack of accord in their ways of 
 translating these and other cardinal words. I have naturally 
 felt some hesitation in deviating from such great scholars as have 
 helped to open up the vast field of Buddhist history and religion, 
 but it is absolutely impossible to keep in harmony with all, so 
 that an eclectic attitude has been adopted. Where, however, 
 there is general accord among European translators such as, 
 for example, in the translation of the Pali terms upadi, khanda, 
 samkhara, samkhata, by ' Substrata/ ' Attribute/ ' Aggregate/ 
 ' Compound ' I have not differed from them save for the weight- 
 iest reasons. 
 
 Besides this matter there are other obstacles before a trans- 
 lator. Even where the meaning of a certain Pali word is clear, 
 and when only a single English equivalent exists, this English 
 word unfortunately has sometimes one or more connotations 
 which do not belong to the Pali term at all. Such, for example, 
 
 3 
 
1 8 ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 is the word vimutti, rendered * Emancipation/ for here the Eng- 
 lish, as I think, has a religious implication foreign to the Pali. 
 To avoid having the reader in this way read too much into the 
 Pali sentences, owing to his having taken the English with too 
 full an extension perhaps, I have adopted, where necessary, the 
 plan of capitalizing the English words, thus Sin, Delusion, 
 Faith, and similar terms. The reader will, therefore, be on his 
 guard against taking such words in their full English meaning 
 with all nuances and connotations. For the convenience of the 
 reader a list of the more important Pali terms, with my English 
 renderings of them, is included in the index. 
 
 Other Difficulties of Translation. The question of Pali ety- 
 mology is largely based on comparison with analogous forms 
 in Sanskrit. A blind adherence to Sanskrit as an aid to solving 
 questions of etymology in Pali is not to be indulged in, for with- 
 out doubt the Pali language, although it has the greatest sim- 
 ilarity with the Sanskrit in grammar and vocabulary, has cut out 
 for itself, in many respects, entirely new linguistic paths. The 
 rise of Buddhism, and also of the Jaina sect, taken together 
 with the ever-increasing use of Pali as a means of literary ex- 
 pression, was not without influence on the Sanskrit. 
 
 Unfortunately, however, there are times when etymology is 
 both doubtful and perplexing. In this particular respect it must 
 be said that the Pali dictionary of Childers (London, 1875) is 
 often inadequate and faulty, but we could not expect it to be 
 otherwise of such a pioneer work. To say that this dictionary 
 abounds in omissions, errors, mistakes, and confusions, or to say 
 that its list of words is from a very limited portion of Pali 
 literature, is merely to say that it is the first and only occidental 
 dictionary of the Pali language. Considering the paucity of 
 published texts in Childers' day, the retarded state of philological 
 information at the time, and the general lack of facilities for 
 such a work, we must look on his achievement as little short of 
 marvelous. But from the nature of the case, the book is unreliable 
 in many respects. Turning to the grammars of Pali which we 
 now have, we find much left to be desired. For ety- 
 
INTRODUCTION 19 
 
 mological purposes Franke's Pali und Sanskrit (Strassburg, 
 1902) is of great use. The same may be said of the Grammaire 
 Palie of Henry (Paris, 1904), though it errs in many ways 
 both in treatment and content. A comprehensive grammar of 
 Pali, similar to Whitney's Sanskrit Grammar, would fill a long- 
 felt need, as would also a biographical and mythological Buddhist 
 encyclopedia. In etymology, therefore, as in other matters, rigor- 
 ous testing must be done at every step, and the suggestions that 
 are here given in the notes as to new solutions are presented 
 with the caution proper in the present state of Pali linguistics. 
 The meaning of such a word as nipaka, ' prudent/ for example, 
 is fairly certain, but its etymology is far from clear; vice versa 
 there are one or two instances of words whose etymology is 
 obvious, but whose precise significance it is almost hopeless to 
 determine. 
 
 It seems desirable in a work of this character to try to render 
 a word always by a constant, unchanging English word. But 
 although this process may be advisable as a rule, it is by no 
 means always feasible in practice. As Paul Cauer, in his ad- 
 mirable little work, Die Kunst des Ubersetzens, Berlin, 1894, p. 48. 
 indicates from the classical standpoint, a qualifying adjective, a 
 varying context, a change in locution, frequently necessitates a 
 different rendering for the same word of the text. In this present 
 translation it has sometimes been necessary to follow this pro- 
 cedure; a noun and a verb, or a noun and an adjective, for 
 instance, which may come from the same Pali root, have had 
 occasionally to be translated by two words from different roots 
 in English. 
 
 It is hoped, furthermore, that the plentiful citation of the 
 obscurer or less common Pali words within parentheses will 
 enable the reader to use this translation for comparative pur- 
 poses by the side of other translations from Pali texts. It has 
 been thought best to give throughout a fairly literal rendering. 
 The conciseness of the Pali makes the unavoidable amplitude 
 of the English seem somewhat rigid and verbose in comparison. 
 It is hoped that my strict adherence to the original will not 
 
2O ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 be found too close ; for when it has become a question of prefer- 
 ence between an elegant rendering and one awkward but more 
 accurate, I have purposely always chosen the latter. It was 
 found impossible to make a metrical translation of the stanzas 
 which should be at all faithful or close to the original. As an 
 aid to the appreciation of the spirit, or tone, of the book, I have 
 made use of the archaic English ending -eth in the verbal forms 
 throughout. 
 
SAYINGS OF BUDDHA 
 
 HAIL TO THAT BLESSED ONE, THAT SANCTIFIED ONE, 
 SUPREME BUDDHA 
 
 i. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' One of the Laws, O monks, ye do forsake. I am your surety, 
 in that I have entered the path from which there is no return/ 1 
 'Which one of the Laws?' 'Ye forsake, O monks, 2 the law 
 against Desire (lobha-). I am your surety in that I have entered 
 the path from which there is no return/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Through their proper knowledge 
 Creatures of Discernment 3 forsake that Desire 
 Through which lustful creatures* 
 Go to misfortune. 
 When they have forsaken it 
 They never return to this world/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 2. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 1 anagamita- ; lit. ' the quality of being one who doth not return,' referring 
 to the third of the four well-known maggas, or Paths. 
 
 3 bhikkhu- ; this word has been variously translated as ' priest, mendicant, 
 mendicant-priest.' Although it does have an element of all these meanings, 
 none of them is entirely satisfactory. Rhys Davids suggests ' member of 
 the order ' as a rendering, but, as he himself says, this translation of the 
 word is too cumbrous to be practicable. 
 
 8 vi-passin- ; lit. 'seeing clearly, seeing thoroughly.' Compare the passage 
 on the ' Spiritual Eyes,' 61, and the word cakkhuma, 45, 47, 104, 109. 
 
 * luddhase ; this lengthened plural form is comparable to the Vedic plural. 
 
 21 
 
22 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 2 - 
 
 ' One of the Laws, O monks, ye do forsake. I am your surety, 
 in that I have entered the path from which there is no return/ 
 'Which one of the Laws?' 'Ye forsake, O monks, the Law 
 against Hate (dosa-). I am your surety in that I have entered 
 the path from which there is no return/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Through their proper knowledge 
 Creatures of Discernment forsake that Hate 
 Through which hating creatures 
 Go to misfortune. 
 When they have forsaken it 
 They never return to- this world/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 3. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' One of the Laws, O monks, ye do forsake. I am your surety, 
 in that I have entered the path from which there is no return/ 
 ' Which one of the Laws ? ' 'Ye forsake, O monks, the Law 
 against Delusion (moha-). I am your surety in that I have 
 entered the path from which there is no return/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Through their proper knowledge 
 Creatures of Discernment forsake that Delusion 
 Through which deluded creatures 
 Go to misfortune. 
 When they have forsaken it 
 They never return to this world/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 4. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
- 6 J TRANSLATION 23 
 
 * One of the Laws, O monks, ye do forsake. I am your surety, 
 in that I have entered the path from which there is no return/ 
 
 * Which one of the Laws ? ' 'Ye forsake, O monks, the Law 
 against Anger (khoda-). I am your surety in that I have entered 
 the path from which there is no return/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Through their proper knowledge 
 Creatures of Discernment forsake that Anger 
 Through which angry creatures 
 Go to misfortune. 
 When they have forsaken it 
 They never return to this world/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 5. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' One of the Laws, O monks, ye do forsake. I am your surety, 
 in that I have entered the path from which there is no return/ 
 ' Which one of the Laws ? ' 'Ye forsake, O monks, the Law 
 against Hypocrisy (makkha-). I am your surety in that I have 
 entered the path from which there is no return/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Through their proper knowledge 
 Creatures of Discernment forsake that Hypocrisy 
 Through which hypocritical creatures 
 Go to misfortune. 
 When they have forsaken it 
 They never return to this world/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 6. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
24 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 6 - 
 
 ' One of the Laws, O monks, ye do forsake. I am your surety, 
 in that I have entered the path from which there is no return.' 
 'Which one of the Laws?' 'Ye forsake, O monks, the Law 
 against Pride (mana-). I am your surety in that I have entered 
 the path from which there is no return.' 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Through their proper knowledge 
 Creatures of Discernment forsake that Pride 
 Through which proud creatures 
 Go to misfortune. 
 When they have forsaken it 
 They never return to this world.' 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 7. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'He, O monks, that doth not understand and comprehend the 
 All (sabba-), and whose thought about it is neither one of re- 
 nunciation nor abandonment, cannot attain destruction of Misery. 
 But he that doth understand and comprehend the All, and whose 
 thought about it is one of renunciation and abandonment, can 
 attain destruction of Misery.' 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Whoso doth wholly know the All, 
 And rejoiceth not in all things 
 He, by his knowledge of the All, 
 Hath passed beyond all Misery.' 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 8. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'He, O monks, that doth not understand and comprehend 
 Pride, and whose thought about it is neither one of renunciation 
 
- 9 ] TRANSLATION 2$ 
 
 nor abandonment, cannot attain destruction of Misery. But he 
 that doth understand and comprehend Pride, and whose thought 
 about it is one of renunciation and abandonment, can attain 
 destruction of Misery/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' This human kind 1 (that is) possessed of Pride, 
 With shackles of Pride, and delighted by Existence, 
 (And that) doth not comprehend Pride 
 They shall attain 2 rebirth. 
 
 And those who, having forsaken Pride, 
 Are freed from its destruction 
 They have overcome its shackles, 
 And have passed beyond all Misery/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 9. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'He, O monks, that doth not understand and comprehend De- 
 sire, and whose thought about it is neither one of renunciation 
 nor abandonment, cannot attain destruction of Misery. But he 
 that doth understand and comprehend Desire, and whose thought 
 about it is one of renunciation and abandonment, can attain de- 
 struction of Misery/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Through their proper knowledge 
 Creatures of Discernment forsake that Desire 
 Through which lustful creatures 
 Go to misfortune. 
 When they have forsaken it 
 They never return to this world/ 
 
 1 pajd,-. Skt. praja-. The first two lines of this stanza are in the singular ; 
 the second two are in the plural. The logical subject throughout is paj&-. 
 
 2 agantaro ; a periphrastic fut. See Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar, 942-947. 
 
26 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 10 - 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 10. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 1 He, O monks, that doth not understand and comprehend Hate, 
 and whose thought about it is neither one of renunciation nor 
 abandonment, cannot attain destruction of Misery. But he that 
 doth understand and comprehend- Hate, and whose thought about, 
 it is one of renunciation and abandonment, can attain destruction 
 of Misery/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'Through their proper knowledge 
 Creatures of Discernment forsake that Hate 
 Through which hating creatures 
 Go to misfortune. 
 When they have forsaken it 
 They never return to this world/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 [End of the] First Chapter about the Surety 
 
 Resume i 
 
 Passion ( i) 1 ; Hate (2) 2 ; then Delusion (3> 3 ; 
 Anger ( 4) ; Hypocrisy ( 5) ; Pride ( 6) ; the All ( 7) ; 
 After Pride (8); the two about Passion (9)*; and Hate 
 
 ( 10) ; 
 These are revealed, they say, as the first chapter. 
 
 11. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 1 Observe the use of rSga-, ' passion ' to gloss lobha-, ' desire/ of the text. 
 
 "This and the previous word are in a dvandva compound in the plural 
 number. 
 
 "This word is put in the nom. case; the others, with the exception noted 
 above, are in the stem form. 
 
- 12 ] TRANSLATION 2/ 
 
 ' He, O monks, that doth not understand and comprehend De- 
 lusion, and whose thought about it is neither one of renunciation 
 nor abandonment, cannot attain destruction of Misery. But he 
 that doth understand and comprehend Delusion, and whose 
 thought about it is one of renunciation and abandonment, can 
 attain destruction of Misery/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Through their proper knowledge 
 Creatures of Discernment forsake that Delusion 
 Through which deluded creatures 
 Go to misfortune. 
 When they have forsaken it 
 They never return to this world/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 12. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'He, O monks, that doth not understand and comprehend 
 Anger, and whose thought about it is neither one of renuncia- 
 tion nor abandonment, cannot attain destruction of Misery. But 
 he that doth understand and comprehend Anger, and whose 
 thought about it is one of renunciation and abandonment, can 
 attain destruction of Misery/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Through their proper knowledge 
 Creatures of Discernment forsake that Anger 
 Through which angry creatures 
 Go to misfortune. 
 When they have forsaken it 
 They never return to this world/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
28 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 13 - 
 
 13. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 * He, O monks, that doth not understand and comprehend Hy- 
 pocrisy, and whose thought about it is neither one of renuncia- 
 tion nor abandonment, cannot attain destruction of Misery. But 
 he that doth understand and comprehend Hypocrisy, and whose 
 thought about it is one of renunciation and abandonment, can 
 attain destruction of Misery/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Through their proper knowledge 
 Creatures of Discernment forsake that Hypocrisy 
 Through which hypocritical creatures 
 Go to misfortune. 
 When they have forsaken it 
 They never return to this world/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 14. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' I see no other single impediment, O monks, by which man- 
 kind 1 is so impeded, and caused for a long time to undergo 
 rebirth and transmigration, as by the impediment of Ignorance. 
 For by the impediment of Ignorance, O monks, mankind is im- 
 peded and for a long time is caused to undergo rebirth and 
 transmigration/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' There is no other single thing 
 By which mankind is so impeded 
 And long undergoeth rebirth, 
 As by the impediment of Delusion. 2 
 
 *paja-; here with the plural verb. See page 25, note i. 
 3 Lit. ' when obstructed by delusion.' 
 
- 1 6 ] TRANSLATION 29 
 
 Those who, forsaking Delusion, 
 
 Have rent the Attribute 1 of Darkness, 
 
 Do not undergo rebirth again, 
 
 (Since) no cause for it is found in them/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 15. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' I see no other single fetter, O monks, by which creatures 
 are so impeded, and caused for a long time to undergo rebirth 
 and transmigration, as by the fetter of Thirst. 2 For by the 
 fetter of Thirst, O monks, creatures are fettered, and for a long 
 time are caused to undergo rebirth and transmigration/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' With Thirst as second a man undergoeth 
 The long journey of transmigration (samsdra-) 
 He doth not escape the rounds of existence 
 Similar and dissimilar (to the present one). 
 
 When he thus findeth that transgression (adinavdr-) 
 Is the source of the Misery of Thirst, 
 The thoughtful monk is freed from Thirst and attachment 
 And may lead a holy life/ 8 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 1 6. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'For a novitiate-monk (sekkha-)* who hath not yet attained 
 
 1 For a discussion of this important word khandha-, see Childers, Pali 
 Dictionary, s. v. 
 
 2 tanha- ; many renderings have been attempted for this word, but I have 
 thought best to give throughout its literal translation 'thirst/ 
 
 3 paribbaje, opt., Skt. pari-vraj-, 'to wander about (as a mendicant).' 
 
 * sekkha- cf. Skt. saikhsa-. There are seven stages of study, or meditation, 
 leading up to the state of asekkha-, a syn. of Arahatship, ' Sanctification.' 
 Compare Buddhaghosa's gloss on Dhp. verse 45. Fausboll renders ' discipulus.' 
 
3O ITI-VUTTAKA [ 1 6 - 
 
 Supreme Security, 1 but who is striving for it, and who liveth 
 with the idea that what is internal (ajjhattika-) is a qualifica- 
 tion (anga-), I see no other single qualification, O monks, so 
 exceeding helpful as profound attention (manasikdra-) . A 
 (novitiate-) monk, then, O monks, who hath profound attention, 
 abandoneth impropriety and acquireth propriety. 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Attention that is profound 
 Is a law for the novitiate-monk ; 
 There is no other law so exceeding helpful 
 For the attainment of the Summum Bonum (uttama-attha-) . 
 By devoting himself profoundly, a monk 
 May attain destruction of Misery/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 17. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' For a novitiate-monk who hath not yet attained supreme Se- 
 curity, but who is striving for it, and who liveth with the idea 
 that what is external (bahira-) is a qualification, I see no other 
 single qualification, O monks, so exceeding helpful as the quality 
 of having goodness (kalyana-) as a friend. A (novitiate-) 
 monk, then, O monks, who hath goodness as his friend, re- 
 nounceth that which is evil, and obtaineth that which is good/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' The monk that hath goodness as friend, 
 Who is obedient and respectful, 
 Doing the behest (vacana-) of his friends, 
 
 1 yogakkhema- ; lit. ' yoke of security,' although it may be dvandva com- 
 pound. In Skt. the two members of this comp. are frequently in collocation, 
 viz., yoga-ksema-, and ksema-yoga-, denoting ' secure possession of what is 
 acquired.' See Monier Williams, Skt. Diet., s. v. 
 
IQ ] TRANSLATION 3 I 
 
 Mindful and thoughtful, 
 May attain in due course 
 The destruction of all the Fetters/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 1 8. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' There is one thing in the world, O monks, which, in coming 
 into existence, existeth to the disadvantage and unhappiness of 
 many people, to the detriment, disadvantage, and misery of many 
 people, gods as well as men/ ' What is this one thing?' ' (It 
 is) dissension in the Order. For in an Order that hath been 
 divided, there are reciprocal (annamannam) quarrels as well as 
 reciprocal abuse, reciprocal disagreement and desertion, and there 
 (i. e. in such an Order) they are discontented and enjoy no con- 
 tentment, and there is diversity 1 of opinion (even) among those 
 who are content/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' A disturber of the Order stayeth for an aeon 
 In punishment and perdition; 
 For he that delighteth in society (vagga-) 
 And abideth not in the Law, falleth from Security 2 ; 
 Having (also) broken up a concordant Order 
 He burneth (lit. is cooked) for an aeon in perdition/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 19. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' There is one thing in the world, O monks, which, in coming 
 into existence, existeth to the disadvantage, and unhappiness of 
 many people, to the detriment, disadvantage and misery of many 
 
 1 annathatta-, anal, to Skt. *anyatha-atman-; lit. ' variousmindedness.' 
 3 See page 30, note i. 
 
32 ITI-VUTTAKA [ IQ - 
 
 people, gods as well as men/ * What is this one thing?' ' (It 
 is) concord in the Order. For in a concordant Order, O 
 monks, there are neither reciprocal quarrels nor reciprocal abuse, 
 nor is there reciprocal disagreement and desertion, and there (*. e. 
 in such an Order) they are contented and enjoy contentment, 
 and among those who are contented there is further 1 (content- 
 ment)/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Happy is the concord of the Order, 
 And the kindliness of those in concord, 
 For he that is delighted by concord, 
 And who abideth in the Law, 
 Falleth not from Security. 
 Having also made the Order concordant 
 He rejoiceth for an aeon in heaven/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 20. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 1 Here (in this world), O monks, comprehending thought by 
 means of thought, I thus recognize a certain individual as having 
 evil thought (cetas-), and this individual at this moment, having 
 completed his (allotted) time, just as is handed down by tradi- 
 tion, 2 has been cast into hell/ ' Why is this ? ' ' Because, O 
 monks, his thought is evil. For (kho pana) in this wise, certain 
 creatures on account of the corruption of their thoughts, after 
 the dissolution of the body after death, go to punishment, mis- 
 fortune, torture, and perdition/ 
 
 1 For Pali bhlyo, Skt. bhuyas, see Franke, Pali und Sanskrit, 226, and 
 Henry, Grammaire Palie, 23. 
 
 2 yathd bhatam; I take bhatam as a pass. ppl. of root bhr-, 'to bear.' The 
 objection to this procedure is that the interpretation in question involves 
 giving a very uncommon meaning to the root bhr-. A tempting and easy 
 emendation of the text would be to read yathabhutam, 'rightly, truly,' but 
 I prefer to force the meaning of bhr-. 
 
- 20 ] TRANSLATION 33 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Knowing a certain individual here 
 As having evil thought, 
 Buddha expounded this matter 1 
 In the presence of his monks. 
 
 And at this moment, 
 
 This individual, having completed his (allotted) time, 2 
 
 Shall attain perdition, 
 
 Since his thought is evil. 
 
 In just such wise will such a one 
 Hereafter fare as is his due. 
 It is because of their corrupt thoughts 
 That creatures go to Misery/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 Resume 2 
 
 Delusion ( u) ; Anger ( 12) ; then Hypocrisy ( 13) ; 
 Delusion (14); Lust (I5) 3 ; two about a novitiate-monk 
 
 (16 and 17)*; 
 
 Dissension ( 18) ; Joy ( I9) 5 ; and an individual ( 20). 
 This, they say, is called the second chapter. 
 
 [End of] the second chapter 
 
 1 Observe the superfluous mention of Buddha's own name. 
 
 8 The line in C, D, E, M, S reads kalam kayiratha puggalo. Its metrical 
 
 scheme is sjTtL* | * ' s ~ x ^ involving synizesis. The MSS. P and 
 
 Pa read the second word kariyS, which I follow, first because as an opt. act. 3d 
 sing., it corresponds phonetically with Skt. kuryat, while kayirStha, if a 3d 
 sing, as is required by the context, would have to be middle voice, and so 
 extremely difficult of explanation ; secondly because of the meter, which would 
 now be >_*s-x| ^ t avoiding synizesis. 
 
 8 kama- is used instead of tanha- of the text. 
 
 * sekkha-, 'novitiate-monk,' is not the important word of 16, 17, but 
 manasikara-, * perfect attention ' and kalyanamittata-, ' having goodness as a 
 friend,' respectively. 
 
 5 mo da-, 
 Order.' 
 
34 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 21 - 
 
 21. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'Here (in this world), O monks, comprehending thought by 
 means of thought, I thus recognize a certain individual as having 
 tranquil thought, and this individual at this moment, having com- 
 pleted his (allotted) time, just as is handed down by tradition, 
 hath been assigned (lit. cast into) heaven/ 'Why is this?' 
 ' Because, O monks, his thought is tranquil. For in this wise, 
 certain creatures on account of the tranquillity of their thoughts, 
 after the dissolution of the body after death, go to prosperity 
 and heaven/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Knowing a certain individual here 
 As having tranquil thought, 
 Buddha expounded this matter 
 In the presence of his monks. 
 
 For at this moment, 
 
 This individual, having completed his (allotted) time, 
 
 Shall attain prosperity, 
 
 Since his thought is tranquil. 
 
 In just such wise will such a one 
 Hereafter fare as is his due. 
 It is because of their tranquil thoughts 
 That creatures go to prosperity/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 22. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 1 
 
 'Be not afraid of virtues (punna-), O monks; this (*. e. the 
 word punna-, "virtuous") is the designation of what is happy, 
 desirable, lovely, pleasing, and charming. Now I, forsooth, O 
 
 1 The prose portion of this section has been translated by A. J. Edmunds, 
 Buddhist and Christian Gospels, Tokyo, 1905, p. 142. 
 
- 22 ] TRANSLATION 3 5 
 
 monks, have long recognized the long-desired, happy, lovely, 
 pleasing, and charming reward respectively enjoyed 1 for virtuous 
 deeds done. Having devoted myself seven 2 years to the thought 
 of Friendship, I did not return to this world for seven samvat 
 aeons and (seven) Revolution aeons 3 ; verily, O monks, at the 
 end of a samvat aeon, I go unto the Radiant Ones 4 ; at the end 
 of a Revolution aeon, I reach the empty palace of Brahma. There, 
 verily, O monks, I become Brahma, the great Brahma, 5 sur- 
 passing, unsurpassed, comprehending the purpose of others, 6 
 and all-powerful. 7 
 
 ' Now I, forsooth, O monks, became Sakka, ruler of the gods, 
 thirty-six times; many hundreds of times was I king, Universal 
 Monarch (cakka-vatti) , lawful king, victorious in the four 
 quarters, maintaining the security of my dominions, possessed 
 of the seven jewels. Now what was the doctrine of that region 
 and kingdom? This is what I thought of it, O monks: "Of 
 what deed of mine is this the fruit? Of what deed is it the 
 result, whereby I now have become of such great prosperity 
 and such great might? Truly it is the fruit of three deeds of 
 mine, it is the result of three deeds of mine, whereby I am 
 at this time of such great prosperity and of such great might, 
 namely, (the three deeds of) Charity (dana-}, of Self-command 
 (dama-), and of Self-control (sannama-)"* 
 
 1 praty-anu-bhu- is the Skt. analogy, lit. * to enjoy one by one, severally.' 
 
 1 Observe that the seven years are in a prior existence. 
 
 * A favorite Buddhist phraseology for very long periods of time. See 99. 
 
 *A class of 64 demigods. See Apte and Monier Williams, s. v. dbhasa-. 
 
 "Buddha and Maha Brahma are usually quite distinct and separate per- 
 sonages. Compare Warren, Buddhism in Translations, pp. 39, 47, 72, 77, 310. 
 
 8 annadatthudasa- ; I would analyze this compound as anya(d*)-artha-drs. 
 The neuter form anyad occurs at the beginning of a compound in Skt. For the 
 u in atthu instead of a, cf. Franke, Pali und Sanskrit, p. 103. The collocation 
 of artha and drs- is not unusual, being found, for example, in the Skt. comp. 
 arthadarsanam, ' perception of objects.' Consult Bohtlingk and Roth, Sanskrit 
 Worterbuch, under anyad. The word occurs again in 112. 
 
 1 vasavattt; Childers translates this word 'bringing into subjection,' while 
 Bohtlingk and Roth translate ' untertan, gehorsam.' The word occurs again 
 in the active sense in 112, where I have likewise rendered it 'all-powerful,' 
 and is found in the passive meaning in 95. 
 
36 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 22 - 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' One should learn virtue which is of extensive goal, 
 And (which hath) the faculty 1 of Happiness ; 
 And one should devote oneself to Charity, 
 To tranquil behavior (samacariyor) and to thoughts of Friend- 
 ship. 
 
 Having devoted himself to these three virtues, 
 Which provide reason for happiness, 
 A wise man gaineth the world of happiness 
 A world all free from distress/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 23. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' A single law, O monks, when practised and given force to 2 
 causeth the attainment* of both welfares, (namely) the present 
 welfare and the future welfare/ 'What is this single law?' 
 'Zeal (appamada-)* in good works. Just this law, O monks, 
 when practised and given force to, causeth the attainment of 
 both welfares, namely, the present and the future welfare/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' The wise praise zeal in virtuous deeds. 
 A wise man who is zealous, 
 Attaineth both welfares; 
 
 1 Compare 60, and see the note on indriya, * faculty.' 
 
 * bahulikata- ; lit. 'made large, abundant.' Compare with Skt. bahula-, 
 'thick, abundant,' and krta-, 'made.' For the f before kr-, cf. Whitney, 
 Sanskrit Grammar, 1093. 
 
 8 samadhigayha ; this compound is not in Guilders, and no analogy exists 
 in Skt. I take gayha as gerund of root grabh-, with the preps, sam-adhi. 
 These two preps, imply motion towards, cf. Skt. sam-adhi-gam-, ' to go toward, 
 approach.' 
 
 Compare Skt. a-pramada-, 'not-inattentive, not-careless, not-neglectful.' 
 
-24] TRANSLATION 37 
 
 The welfare which is in this seen world, 
 And the welfare in the future (world). 
 A man that is steadfast 
 In his grasp upon them 
 Is called wise.' 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 24. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' Of any individual who undergoeth transmigration, and who 
 is reborn for an aeon (of time), there would be thus a great 
 skeleton of bones, a mass of bones, a heap of bones, just like 
 this huge mountain ; if there should be made a gathering of them, 
 the collection could not disappear/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' The heap of bones of every individual 
 For every deed, would be a pile 
 Like unto a mountain. 
 Thus the Great Sage hath said. 1 
 
 And this mass is said to be 
 A mighty mountain 
 Higher than "Vulture-Peak" 2 
 In Giribbaja of the Magadhas. 
 
 And likewise through proper wisdom 
 One may see the Noble Truths: 
 Misery, its origin and its termination, 
 The holy Eightfold Path 
 That leadeth to the stilling 3 of Misery. 
 
 1 Observe the superfluous mention of Buddha's name, as in 20. 
 3 A mountain near Rajagaha. Compare Lanman, Sanskrit Reader, p. 27, 
 V, line i. 
 
 9 upasama-, Skt. upa-sam-. See 90 f, 87 e, no 1, 103 p. 
 
38 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 24- 
 
 This individual being reborn seven times at most 
 Through the destruction of the Fetters, 
 Becometh a maker of the end of Misery/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 25. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' I do not say, O monks, that there is any evil deed that is 
 incapable of being done, by an individual that hath transgressed 
 a (certain) single Law/ 'What Law?' 'Just this, O monks 
 the Law (against) intentional falsehood (sampajana-musavada-) / 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Of one that hath transgressed that one Law 
 (Which forbiddeth) Falsehood, and that is 
 Unmindful of the future world of him 
 There is no sin undone/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 26. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' Creatures should know the result, O monks, of the distri- 
 bution of charity (lit. gifts), just as I know it; they should 
 not eat without having given ; and the stain of selfishness should 
 not make its deep impression on their hearts. Whatever least 
 bit or morsel they may have, if there should be anyone to receive 
 of it, they should not eat without first having shared. And since, 
 moreover, O monks, creatures do not know the result of the 
 distribution of charity, as I know it for this reason, they eat 
 without having first given, and the stain of selfishness hath made 
 its deep impression on their hearts/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
- 27 ] TRANSLATION 39 
 
 ' If creatures should know 
 (Just as the Great Sage hath said), 
 What wondrous fruit 
 Cometh from giving gifts 
 
 Having with undisturbed mind 
 
 Put away all stain of selfishness 
 
 They would give proper gifts to the deserving; 
 
 From this act there cometh (to them) great reward. 
 
 And having given much 1 food 
 
 As a gift to the deserving, 2 
 
 Benefactors, when they leave 
 
 This human life (manussatta-) , do go to heaven. 
 
 And those that have gone to heaven 
 Rejoice there in bliss 3 ; 
 (And) losing their selfishness, they enjoy 
 The result of generosity.' 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 27. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' Whatsoever materials there are, O monks, for the acquisition 
 of Virtue (punna-kiriyarvatthu-) , connected with the Substrata, 4 
 
 1 bahuno, a gen. sing., shows a transfer to the consonant declension ; see 
 Henry, Grammaire Palie, 170, notes i and 2. 
 
 * dakkhineyyesu ; for the loc. case used in the sense of a dat. in Sanskrit, 
 see Speyer, Sanskrit Syntax, 145. 
 
 1 kamakamina- ; lit. 'rejoicing in love,' a compound usually employed in a 
 bad sense. 
 
 * upadhi- ; this term presents one of the most difficult problems to the trans- 
 lator. Childers, Pali Diet., defines it as ' a wheel; the body; substratum of 
 being.' He notes also that there are four varieties of upadhi, namely, the 
 khandhas, ' Attributes,' Kama, ' Lust,' kilesa, ' depravity, defilement,' and 
 kamma, ' moral merit, Karma.' As a rendering I have chosen ' Substratum,' 
 and it occurs in 51, 73, 77, 112. For further discussion see Muller, The 
 Dhammapada, SEE. 10, note on verse 418. Compare also my reference at 
 
 57, note 2, below. 
 Connected in meaning with upadhi-, is the word upadi-, occurring usually in 
 
4<D ITI-VUTTAKA [ 27 - 
 
 all these do not equal a sixteenth part (the value) of Friendliness 
 (mettd-), 1 (which is) an emancipation of the thoughts (ceto- 
 vimutti-) ; for Friendliness, verily, an emancipation of the 
 thoughts, transcending (everything), 2 doth shine, and glow, and 
 radiate. 
 
 ' Just as, O monks, whatever may be the light (pabha-) of the 
 starry forms, all (together) do not equal a sixteenth part of the 
 light of the moon, for the latter, verily, transcending them, doth 
 shine, and glow, and radiate; even so, O monks, whatsoever 
 materials there may be for the acquisition of Virtue, connected 
 with the Substrata, all these do not equal a sixteenth part 
 (the value) of Friendliness, (which is) an emancipation of the 
 thoughts; for Friendliness, verily, emancipation of the thoughts, 
 transcending (everything), doth shine, and glow, and radiate. 
 
 'Just as, O monks, in the last month of the rainy season, in 
 autumn time, when the sky is clear 3 and the clouds have rifted 
 (vigata-), the sun, ascending the sky and pervading all that is 
 situate either in light or in darkness, doth shine, and glow, and 
 radiate; even so, O monks, whatsoever materials there may be 
 for the acquisition of Virtue, connected with the Substrata, all 
 these do not equal a sixteenth part (the value) of Friendliness, 
 (which is) an emancipation of the thoughts; for Friendliness, 
 verily, emancipation of the thoughts, transcending (everything), 
 doth shine, and glow, and radiate. 
 
 'Just as, O monks, at night when the dawn draweth near, 
 the morning-star* doth shine, and glow, and radiate; even so, 
 
 the compound upadisesa-, ' having the Substrata remaining ' ; this compound 
 occurs in 44, 45, 46, and 47 of this work. The etymology of upadi- is not 
 certain; Childers compares it with Skt. up-S-da-. He notes that the Northern 
 Buddhists frequently confuse the two words. 
 
 1 This characteristic of perfect kindliness will be exemplified in Meteyya, the 
 coming Buddha. The word metta- is sometimes rendered ' love,' but I prefer 
 to translate literally, comparing with Skt. maitra-, ' a friend.' 
 
 3 adhi-gahetva ; this compound of the root grdbh-, 'to seize,' does not occur 
 in Sanskrit. Pischel, who has translated the prose of this section, Leben und 
 Lehre des Buddha, p. 78, renders this word ' nimmt sic in sich auf.' 
 
 8 MS. S reads viddhe, Skt. vyadh-, vidh-, ' pierced.' 
 
 * osadhi-t araka ; lit. 'the star presiding over medicine.' See Childers, Pali 
 Diet., s. v. The same epithet occurs in Sinhalese, v. Clough, Sink. Diet. 
 
- 2 7 ] TRANSLATION 4! 
 
 O monks, whatsoever materials there may be for the acquisition 
 of Virtue, connected with the Substrata, all these do not equal 
 a sixteenth part (the value) of Friendliness, (which is) an eman- 
 cipation of the thoughts; for Friendliness, verily, an emancipa- 
 tion of the thoughts, transcending (everything), doth shine, and 
 glow, and radiate/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 * Few are the Fetters of him 
 That doth see the destruction of the Substrata; 
 Who is thoughtful, and who doth possess 
 Boundless (appamdna-) Friendliness. 
 
 If one doth act in friendly wise, 
 
 With no evil thought toward any single creature, 
 
 And in so doing becometh proper, 
 
 And if he have compassion in his soul (manas-, lit. mind) 
 
 Toward all living beings this noble one 
 
 Doth acquire abundant Virtue. 
 
 Those royal sages (r&fisayo), who, after conquering 
 The earth with its myriads of creatures, 
 Have gone round it offering sacrifice 1 
 
 (The Horse Sacrifice, the Human Sacrifice, 2 the Samma- 
 pasa Sacrifice, 8 
 
 1 anupariyaga, Skt. anu-pary-a-gam- ; which Bohtlingk and Roth define as 
 ' durchgehen, durchwandern,' citing only one instance of its occurrence, viz., 
 Mahabharata, 12.223.24, Bombay edit., or 12.8081, Calcutta edit. This MBh. 
 passage reads yada ca prthivim sarvam yajamano 'nuparyagah, ' formerly, 
 engaged in sacrifice, thou hadst gone around all the earth,' etc. See Ray, Trans- 
 lation of the Mahabharata, Calcutta, 1891, vol. n, p. 195. 
 
 It seems to me conclusive that our Pali text contains here a quotation 
 from the Sanskrit. Not only in both cases do we have the rare word 
 anupariyaga immediately following yajamana, ' sacrificing,' but the entire pas- 
 sage is remarkably similar in both. 
 
 'These sacrifices seem likewise a reminiscence of the Mahabharata; see 
 Hopkins, Great Epic, pp. 377 ff., and 474. 
 
 * sammapasam ; Childers defines this word as ' one of the four great 
 sacrifices, Hindu, not Buddhist. He gives no etymology. Professor Jackson 
 
42 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 2 7 ~ 
 
 The Vajapeyya Sacrifice unrestrainedly 1 ), 2 
 Are not equal to the sixteenth part of a heart (citta-) well 
 trained and kindly. 3 
 
 He that killeth not, and causeth not to kill 4 
 Who doth not injure, and who causeth not to injure 5 
 Hath the friendship of all creatures; 
 There is no wrath at him for any cause/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 Resume j 
 
 Contemplative in heart (2i) 6 ; the two welfares (23) ; 
 Virtue (22) 7 ; huge mountain (24)*; 
 Intentional falsehood (25) ; 
 
 suggests comparing sammapasa- with Skt. samyaprasa-, in connection with the 
 rajasuya sacrifice ; compare Weber, Uber den rajasuya, Abh. der Berl. Akad., 
 July, 1893, p. 85, note 5 ; see also Monier Williams, Skt. Diet., s. v. Subhuti, 
 Abhidhanappadlpika, 413, includes it among 'the five great sacrifices.' 
 
 1 niraggalam, Skt. nir-argala. Clough, Sinhalese Dictionary, p. 292, says 
 this was * one of the four great sacrifices ' ; Subhuti, Abhidhanappadlpika, 
 413, includes it among ' the five great sacrifices.' In my judgment both are 
 in error. Literally the word means, ' without a bolt, unrestrained, unbarred,' 
 and secondarily, ' unhindered, freely/ these being the meanings in Sanskrit. 
 
 2 These two lines, which are put in parentheses in Windisch's edition, are 
 found also in a somewhat different connection in the Samyutta Nikd,ya, ed. by 
 Leon Peer, PTS. vol. i, p. 76. 
 
 8 Directly after this six-line stanza is the following verse ; chandappabha 
 taragana va sabbe. Windisch puts it in parentheses, and thinks it an old 
 interpolation. On merely metrical reasons it is certainly an interloper ; the 
 words, which mean 'as all the groups of stars the radiance of the moon,' 
 have no apparent connection with th* verses preceding. It is possible that 
 this verse crept in from the prose portion of this section. 
 
 * ghateti, caus. of han-, to kill/ 
 
 8 jinati, Skt. jya-. 
 
 8 Not cittam jhayi, but rather pasanna-citta-, ' tranquil in heart/ are the 
 words of the text. 
 
 T Observe the misplacement of the resumes of 22, 23, for metrical 
 reasons. 
 
 8 This is an emphatic word in 24, but it does not appear to me to be 
 particularly appropriate as a key-word for the passage. 
 
- 28 ] TRANSLATION 43 
 
 Both giving ( 26) ; and the state of Friendship ( 27). M 
 
 All these stanzas (sutta-) 
 
 And the twenty preceding ones 
 
 Are stanzas (suttanta-) 2 about divers laws. 
 
 (In all, they are) twenty-seven sections. 
 
 End of the first division. 
 
 SECOND DIVISION 
 
 28. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 * By being possessed of two things, O monks, doth a monk 
 live in this world in Misery, with its vexation, its despair, 
 and its distress, and after the dissolution of the body after 
 death, Misfortune awaiteth him/ 'What are these two things?' 
 ' By not guarding the door to the senses 3 and by intemperance* 
 in eating. By being possessed of these two things, O monks, a 
 monk doth live in this world in Misery, with its vexation, its 
 despair, and its distress, and after the dissolution of the body 
 after death, Misfortune awaiteth him/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Sight, hearing, and smell, 
 Taste, touch, and consciousness 
 Whatsoever monk here (in this world) 
 Hath these doors unguarded, 
 
 He, being intemperate in eating, 
 Unrestrained in his senses, 
 Attaineth unto Misery, 
 Of body and soul 5 alike. 
 
 1 The words bhava-, ' condition,' and ca ca, ' both and,' are added metri 
 gratia. 
 
 a The two different words both meaning stanza are used for metrical 
 reasons. See Subhuti, Pali Dictionary, where suttanta is glossed by sutta. 
 
 * See page 71, note 4. 
 
 * amattannuta- ; lit. * the quality of being unfamiliar with moderation.' This 
 compound is not cited by Bohtlingk and Roth in Sanskrit. 
 
 *cetas-; lit. 'thought.' 
 
44 
 
 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 28 - 
 
 Such a one doth live in Misery 
 Whether it be by day or by night, 
 Inflamed in body 
 And inflamed in soul/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Bbssed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 29. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'By being possessed of two things, O monks, doth a monk 
 live in this world in happiness, with its lack of vexation, its 
 lack of despair, and its lack of distress, and after the disso- 
 lution of the body after death, felicity awaiteth him/ ' What 
 are these two things ? ' 'By guarding the door to the senses, 
 and by temperance in eating. By being possessed of these two 
 things, O monks, doth a monk live in this world in happiness, 
 with its lack of vexation, its lack of despair, its lack of distress, 
 and after the dissolution of the body after death, felicity awaiteth 
 him/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Sight, hearing, and smell, 
 Taste, touch, and consciousness 
 Whatsoever monk here (in this world) 
 Hath these doors guarded, 
 
 He, being temperate in eating, 
 Restrained in his senses, 
 Attaineth unto happiness, 
 Of body and soul alike. 
 
 Such a one doth live in happiness 
 Whether it be by day or by night, 
 Uninflamed in body 
 And uninflamed in soul/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
- 3O ] TRANSLATION 45 
 
 30. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' There are these two things, O monks, which give (me) pain/ 
 ' What two ? ' ' There is here, O monks, a certain man that hath 
 not done (acts) that are good and righteous, who hath not 
 given protection to those that are afraid, and who hath done 
 (acts) that are hard-hearted 1 and guilty. The goodness which 
 he hath not done doth cause me pain, and the evil which he hath 
 done, doth cause me pain. 2 These are the two things, O monks, 
 which cause me pain/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' He that hath sinned 
 In body, word, or thought, 
 Or in anything 
 That is called sinful, 
 
 Doing not that which is righteous, 
 But doing much that is unrighteous 
 This fool after the dissolution of the body, 
 Shall go to perdition/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 31. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'There are these two things, O monks, which give (me) no 
 pain/ 'What two?' 'There is here, O monks, a certain man 
 that hath done (acts) that are good and righteous, who hath 
 given protection to those that are afraid, and who hath not 
 done (acts) that are hard-hearted and guilty. The goodness 
 which he hath done, doth cause me no pain, and the evil which 
 he hath not done, doth not cause me pain. These are the two 
 things, O monks, which do not cause me pain/ 
 
 1 thaddha-, Skt. stabdha-; in his fifth subdivision under this latter word, 
 Apte, Skt. Diet., renders 'hard-hearted, cruel, stern.' 
 a Sins of omission, and sins of commission. 
 
46 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 3 1 ~ 
 
 To this effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I have 
 heard. 
 
 ' He that avoideth sin 
 In body, word, and thought, 
 Or anything that is called sinful, 
 Doing much that is righteous, 
 But not doing that which is unrighteous 
 This virtuous man, after the dissolution of the body, shall 
 go to heaven/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 32. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'An individual is cast into perdition, O monks, by being pos- 
 sessed of two qualities as is handed down by tradition.' 1 ' What 
 two?' 'Evil character (papaka-slla-) and evil Belief. An in- 
 dividual by being possessed of these two qualities, O monks, is 
 cast into perdition, as is handed down by tradition/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' That man that is possessed 
 Of the two evil qualities 
 Of evil character and evil Belief, 
 Is a wicked man, 
 
 Who, after the dissolution of the body, 
 Shall go to perdition/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 33. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' An individual is translated 2 into heaven, O monks, by being 
 possessed of two qualities, as is handed down by tradition/ 
 'What two?' 'Upright character and upright Belief. An indi- 
 
 1 See page 32, note 2. 
 
 2 nikkhitta-, lit. ' cast into,' as in 32 above. 
 
- 34 ] TRANSLATION 47 
 
 vidual by being possessed of these two qualities, O monks, is 
 translated into heaven, as is handed down by tradition/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' That man that is possessed 
 Of the two upright qualities 
 Of upright character and upright Belief, 
 Is a virtuous man, who, 
 After the dissolution of the body, 
 Shall go to heaven/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 34. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'A slothful, froward 1 monk is unfit for Supreme Enlighten- 
 ment, O monks, is unfit for Nirvana, is unfit for the attainment 
 of the Supreme Security 2 ; but the monk that is ardent, O monks, 
 and not froward, is fit for Supreme Enlightenment, is fit for 
 Nirvana, and is fit for the attainment of the Supreme Security/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' A monk, who is slothful and froward, 
 Indolent and feeble, 
 Who hath much idleness and laziness, 
 Who is shameless and disrespectful 
 Such a monk is unfit 
 To attain Supreme Enlightenment. 
 
 He that is thoughtful, prudent, 8 and reflective, 
 Fervent, not froward, and earnest, 
 
 *anottappa-; see Mrs. Rhys Davids, DhS. p. 20, and SBE. 9. 8. ottappa- 
 means ' fear of censure, dread of reproach, decency in outward behavior.' 
 
 2 See page 30, note i. 
 
 'nipaka-; the etymology of this word is doubtful; it is perhaps compar- 
 able to Skt. pac-, ' to cook,' hence, ' ripe, mature, drinking in knowledge, 
 receptive/ It occurs also in 45, 47, 93, 37 c. 
 
48 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 34 ~ 
 
 Hath destroyed his Fetters of Birth and Death; 
 He may attain Supreme Enlightenment e'en here (on 
 earth)/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken b% the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 35. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' People should know me, O monks, as saying that the life of 
 chastity (brahma-cariya-) is not lived for the purpose of deceiv- 
 ing or prating to mankind, nor for the sake of the advantage 
 (anisamsa-) of a reputation (siloka-) for gain and one's own 
 affairs 1 ; but as saying that this life of chastity is lived, O 
 monks, for the purpose of Restraint and Renunciation 
 (pahana-).' 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'The Blessed One hath pointed out 
 That a life of chastity without traditional instruction, 2 
 With the goal of Restraint (samvara-) and 
 Renunciation, is the road that leadeth 3 to Nirvana. 
 
 This path is attained by great-souled sages; 
 
 All those that enter upon it, 
 
 As the Blessed One hath pointed out, 
 
 l sakkara-; in my opinion this word is not the equivalent of Skt satkara-, 
 ' hospitality/ as is stated in Childers, Pali Diet. s. v. I compare it with Skt. 
 sva-, 'his, their' and k&ra-, 'business, affair.' The doubling of the k is 
 difficult to explain; an exact parallel, however, is found in the compound 
 sakkayabhirata, ' taking delight in their own bodies,' 93 h. The doubling of 
 the k may be in compensation for the loss of the v in the preceding syllable. 
 sakkara- occurs again in 36, 80, 81 of this work. 
 
 3 anitiham ; notice the hit against the brahmans. Compare R. Morris, 
 Notes and Queries, PTS. 1886, p. in. 
 
 *gadh-; this root is cited by Panini and other native grammarians, and by 
 Whitney, Roots of Skt. Lang., but the latter questions its genuineness as not 
 occurring in any extant Sanskrit text. Its occurrence in Pali confirms its 
 genuineness in Sanskrit. The same root occurs again in this work, in 36 
 below and 95 i. In the latter passage I have rendered ' connection.' 
 
- 37 ] TRANSLATION 49 
 
 Will end their Misery, 
 
 For they carry out 
 
 The commands of the Teacher.' 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 36. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 "People should know me, O monks, as saying that the life 
 of chastity is not lived for the purpose of deceiving or prating 
 to mankind, nor for the sake of the advantage of a reputation 
 for gain and one's own affairs; but as saying that this life of 
 chastity is lived, O monks, for the purpose of Insight and 
 Thorough Knowledge/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' The Blessed One hath pointed out 
 That a life of chastity without traditional instruction, 
 With the goal of Insight and Thorough Knowledge, 
 Is the road which leadeth to Nirvana. 
 
 This path is attained by great-souled sages; 
 
 All those that enter upon it, 
 
 As the Blessed One hath pointed out, 
 
 Will end their Misery, 
 
 For they carry out 
 
 The commands of the Teacher/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 37. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'A monk liveth with much happiness and enjoyment in this 
 visible world, O monks, by being possessed of two things, and 
 he hath begun to destroy profoundly 1 his sins/ ' What are these 
 
 1 yoniso, Skt. yoni-sas; lit. 'from the womb, fundamentally/ It glosses 
 line d of the stanza below. It is used also to gloss vijjcL-, 'knowledge/ and 
 n&na-, ' understanding/ The same word is also used in 16. 
 
 5 
 
5O ITI-VUTTAKA [ 37 
 
 two things ? ' 'By being cautious in matters requiring caution, 1 
 and by striving profoundly for spiritual power. 2 A monk doth 
 live with much happiness and enjoyment in this visible world by 
 being possessed of these two things, and he hath begun to destroy 
 profoundly his sins/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' A wise man should be cautious 
 In places requiring caution. 
 A fervent, prudent monk, 
 Reflecting with wisdom. 
 
 Thus living fervent, reposeful in manner, 
 
 Not vaunting himself 3 
 
 Possessed of tranquillity of soul (cetas-), 
 
 He may attain unto the destruction of Misery/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 [End of] first chapter [of second division] 
 
 Resume 4 
 
 These two (about a) monk (28, 29)*; painful 
 
 And Pleasant (things) (30, 31); by opposite qualities 
 
 (32, 33) 5 ; 
 A fervent (one) (34) 6 ; and (two on) non-deception (35, 
 
 36); 
 
 1 samvejana-, Skt. sam-vij-, 'to tremble.' There is evidently a play o 
 words between this word and samvega-. 
 
 *samvega-; Bohtlingk and Roth define this word in Sanskrit as 'cine 
 heftige Gemutsaufregung, Heftigkeit, Gewalt.' 
 
 * Literally, ' not puffed up.' 
 
 * In both of these stanzas indriya, ' sense/ not bhikku, is the important key 
 word. 
 
 B Indefinite for good and bad slla- and ditthi-, ' character and Belief.' 
 *atapi, absent in all MSS. except S. The word anottapi, 'not froward/ 
 would be expected rather than atapi, as it comes first in the text. 
 
- 38 ] TRANSLATION 5 1 
 
 By enjoyment ( 37) 1 -; these ten. 2 
 
 38. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' Two ideas, 3 O monks, greatly concern the Consummate One, 
 the Sanctified One, the Supremely Enlightened One: the idea of 
 Security (khema-) and the idea of Solitude (paviveka-) . For 
 the Consummate One, O monks, delighteth in and is delighted by 
 Non-injury.* This particular idea much concerneth the Con- 
 summate One, delighting in and delighted by Non-injury, viz., 
 " By this deportment I cause no injury to animate or inanimate 
 life." 5 
 
 ' The Consummate One, O monks, delighteth in and is delighted 
 by Solitude. This particular idea much concerneth the Con- 
 summate One, delighting in and delighted by Solitude, viz., 
 " Whatever is wicked hath been forsaken." 
 
 ' Therefore do ye live, O monks, delighting in and delighted 
 by Non-injury. For those of you, O monks, who live delighting 
 in and delighted by Non-injury, this particular idea will be of 
 great concern, viz., " By this deportment we cause no injury to 
 animate or inanimate life." Therefore likewise, O monks, do ye 
 live, delighting in and delighted by Solitude. For those of you, 
 O monks, who live delighting in and delighted by Solitude, this 
 particular idea is of great concern, viz., " Whatsoever is wicked 
 hath been forsaken."' 
 
 1 The important word of the section is not this, but samvejariiyesu thanesu, 
 ' in matters requiring caution.' somanassa, ' enjoyment/ is put in the instr. case 
 metri gratia. 
 
 2 The resume of these ten sections (28-37) is given again after 49 below, 
 with, however, considerable variations. 
 
 3 vitakka- ; Mrs. Rhys Davids DhS. 7, 160, 166, 263, 283, 441 a, 461, 
 renders ' conception.' As I translate citta- by ' thought,' I prefer here to 
 render ' idea.' 
 
 4 abyabajjha- ; cf. Skt. root badh- t 'to injure.' In Skt. the root is not 
 compounded with the preps, here in the Pali word, namely, a, vi, a. We find 
 here apparently the Ahimsa doctrine which is especially characteristic of the 
 Jain religion. 
 
 5 tasam va thavaram va; lit. 'moving and stationary.' 
 
52 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 38 - 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Two ideas greatly concern the Consummate One, 
 Buddha, he that endureth the unendurable. 
 The first (of these) is called Security, 
 The second is called Seclusion (viveka-). 
 
 That great Sage who hath dispelled darkness, who hath 
 
 crossed the Flood, 
 
 Who is self -subdued, and freed from the Taints, 1 
 He hath gained the highest Gain. 
 That man, wholly emancipated 
 
 By destruction of Thirst, I declare 
 
 (To be) a saint that hath put on his final body, 
 
 That hath abandoned Pride 
 
 And passed beyond Old Age. 
 
 Even as one standing on a mountain top 
 
 May see rocks and mankind on every side, 
 
 Just so the well-known Sumedha, 
 
 Having ascended the Highest Dharma, like a palace (roof), 
 
 Casting his glance on every side, looketh down with grief 
 
 departed, 
 On mankind immersed in grief, and overcome by Birth and 
 
 Old Age/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 39. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'The Consummate One, the Sanctified One, the Supremely 
 Enlightened One, O monks, hath given 2 these two command- 
 ments, the one higher than the other.' 3 'What two?' '"Let 
 
 1 See page 65, note 2. 
 
 2 Literally * Of the Sanctified One, etc., there are these two commandments.' 
 *pariyd,ya-; the same use of the instr. case of this word occurs in Skt. 
 
4] TRANSLATION 53 
 
 Sin (papa-) be beheld from the standpoint of its sinfulness"; 
 this is the first commandment. "And when ye have thus beheld 
 Sin, be ye disgusted at it, loathe it, and become freed from it." 
 These, O monks, are the two commandments, the one higher than 
 the other, as given by the Consummate One, the Sanctified One, 
 the Supremely Enlightened One/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'Behold the Word (vacana-) and the manner (of its pres- 
 entation), 
 
 The two recognized commandments 
 Of the Consummate One, the Buddha, 
 Compassionate to all creatures. 
 
 Look on Sin and loathe it; 
 With minds loathing it, 
 Then will ye make 
 An end of Misery/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 40. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 * Ignorance (avijja-), O monks, goeth before the performance 
 of wicked deeds (dhamma-) (lit. things) ; in its train 1 follow 
 Shamelessness and Hardness of Heart. 2 Knowledge, O monks, 
 goeth before the performance of good deeds, and in the train 
 (of these) follow Shame and Fear of Sinning/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Whatsoever misfortunes there are 
 Here in this world or in the next, 
 They all have their root in Ignorance 
 And in the accumulation of Longing (iccha-) and Desire. 
 
 1 anvad-eva ; for euphonic d, cf. sammadanna-, in i c. 
 
 2 anottappa-; the opposite ottappa- in 42 is rendered * fear of sinning,' *. e. 
 sensitiveness of conscience. 
 
54 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 40 - 
 
 And inasmuch as he hath evil Longing, 
 And is shameless and regardless, 
 For that reason he breedeth Sin, 
 And he goeth to punishment thereby. 
 
 Therefore by becoming emancipated from 
 Yearning (chanda-) and Desire and Ignorance, 
 And by acquiring knowledge, 
 A monk may abandon all misfortunes/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 First portion for recital 
 
 41. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' Greatly deficient, O monks, are those creatures who are defi- 
 cient in holy wisdom : they dwell in Misery in this visible world, 
 (in Misery) with its obstacles, with its impending pain, with its 
 anguish; and after death and the dissolution of the body, mis- 
 fortune awaiteth them. But those are not deficient, O monks, 
 who are not deficient in holy wisdom, dwell in happiness 
 in the visible world, without obstacles, without impending pain, 
 without anguish ; and after death and the dissolution of the body, 
 felicity awaiteth them/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' It is through lack of wisdom 
 One thinketh that This 1 is true, 
 As he looketh on this world 
 Immersed in Name and Form. 
 
 For in the world that is the best wisdom 
 Which leadeth to Discrimination, 
 And which rightly comprehendeth 
 The destruction of Birth and Existence. 
 
 1 idam, ' das Weltall.' The same use of the word is found in Skt. ; see ref. 
 in BohtHngk and Roth, s. v. 
 
-42] TRANSLATION 55 
 
 Both gods and men are envious of those 
 Who are supremely enlightened, 
 Heedful, having wisdom, and who 
 Have put on their final body.' 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 42. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 * These two laws, O monks, do protect the world/ ' What 
 two?' 'Shame and Fear of Sinning. If these two laws did 
 not protect the world, ye would not make distinction between 
 mothers or aunts, or aunts-in-law, or the wives of preceptors 
 (acariya-), or the wives of teachers 1 ; the world would go 2 to 
 confusion; for example, goats with sheep, cocks with sows (!), 8 
 dogs with jackals. And inasmuch, indeed, as these two pure laws 
 do protect the world, O monks, for that reason there is distinc- 
 tion between mothers, aunts, aunts-in-law, wives of preceptors, 
 and wives of teachers/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' In whomsoever Shame and Fear of Sinning 
 Are found at all times, 
 These persons, radically pure, have passed beyond (i. e. the 
 
 Flood), 
 And go no more to Birth and Death. 
 
 And further, in whomsoe'er Shame and Fear of Sinning 
 Are always duly present, 
 
 These goodly people, flourishing (virulha-) in the life 
 Of chastity, have destroyed re-existence/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 1 garu- ; why have not mothers-in-law been included ? 
 
 2 agamissa ; an example of the rare conditional mood. See Whitney, 
 Sanskrit Grammar, 940. 
 
 kukkutas&kara-. 
 
56 ITI-VUTTAKA [43~ 
 
 43. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' There is, O monks, something not born, non-existent, not made, 
 not compounded. If there were not this something not born, 
 non-existent, not made, not compounded, there would not be 
 known here deliverance from what is born, existent, made, and 
 compounded. Since, indeed, O monks, there is something not 
 born, non-existent, not made, and not compounded, therefore 
 there is known deliverance from what is born, existent, made, and 
 compounded/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' It is not possible to delight in That 1 which is born, 
 Which has existence, is produced, is made, is com- 
 pounded, unstable, 
 Subject to Old Age and Death, 
 A nest of diseases, fragile, 2 
 And owing its operative cause 
 To the current of subsistence. 3 
 
 The destruction of This is a state that is tranquil, 
 
 That hath passed beyond conjecture, 
 
 That is not born and not produced, 
 
 That is griefless and passionless 
 
 The annihilation of the conditions of Misery, 
 
 A happy cessation of Doubt/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 44. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 1 tad ; used after the manner of idam rupam, Dhp. 148, representing the 
 human body, characterized as roga-mla-, ' a nest of diseases.' This latter 
 attribute also appears in the Dhammapada, 148. 
 
 2 pabhahgunam, Skt. prabhangana, * zerbrechlich ' ; for the na suffix, cf . 
 Whitney, Skt. Gram. 1223 g. Fausboll has ' fragilis.' 
 
 8 ahara-netti- ; cf. Skt. ahara, 'subsistence,' and netrl-, 'a river.' Com- 
 pare nettichinna-, 94 b. 
 
- 44 ] TRANSLATION 57 
 
 'There are, O monks, these two Elements 1 of Nirvana/ 
 'What two?' 'The Nirvana element of having the Substrata 
 (upadi-) still remaining, and the Nirvana element of having the 
 Substrata no longer remaining. 2 
 
 ' What, O monks, is the Nirvana Element which hath aol the 
 Substrata remaining? A monk becometh sanctified here (in 
 this world), if he, while living, hath destroyed his Taints if 
 he hath done that which ought to be done, if he hath laid aside 
 his burdens, if he hath attained good welfare, if he hath de- 
 stroyed the Fetters of Existence, if he is emancipated by Per- 
 fect Knowledge. He hath five moral qualities, iris., his mind 
 is unimpeded, he experienceth 3 what is pleasant and unpleasant, 
 and he cometh to know happiness and misery. His destruction 
 of Passion, of Anger, of Ignorance, is called the Nirvana Ele- 
 ment of having the Substrata remaining. 
 
 ' What, O monks, is the Nirvana Element which doth not 
 have the Substrata remaining? A monk becometh sanctified 
 here (in this world), if, while living, he hath done that which 
 ought to be done, if he hath laid aside his burdens, if he hath 
 attained good welfare, if he hath destroyed the Fetters of Ex- 
 istence, if he is emancipated by Perfect Knowledge. All his 
 feelings, 4 O monks, if not rejoiced in here (in this world) will 
 become cold 5 This, O monks, is called the Nirvana Element 
 of not having the Substrata remaining. These, O monks, are the 
 two Nirvana Elements/ 
 
 1 dhatu-; for its usage cf. Mrs. Rhys Davids, DhS. 455, 648, 703, 1333. 
 
 2 This mention of the partial, as well as the total separation from things 
 earthly, as an element, or condition, of Nirvana, seems to lend strong con- 
 firmation to the view of the doctrine of Nirvana advanced by Childers, 
 Pali Diet., s. v. Compare my note on 27. According to Kern, Indian 
 Buddhism, p. 50, note 2, this passage contradicts absolutely lines e and f of 
 the first stanza below of this section. He says that this particular prose- 
 passage is wrong, but that lines e and f below have the correct definition. 
 
 3 paccanubhoti, Skt. praty-anu-bhu-, * to suffer, bear, undergo.' 
 
 * vedayitani, a ppl. used in place of the more common noun, vedita-. 
 
 5 slta-, Skt. sita-, ' cold.' For the change of final a to I before bhu-, cf. 
 Whitney, Skt. Gram., 1092, 1093, and Franke, Pali und Sanskrit, p. 103, note 
 72. For similar formations in the Avesta, see Bartholomae, Altiranisches Wor- 
 terbuch, s. v. saoci-bhu- and varaOa-bhft-. 
 
58 ITI-VUTTAKA [44~ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' These two Nirvana elements have been made known by Such 
 
 a One (tadina) 
 
 As hath Spiritual Insight, the one Element, verily, hath 
 A visible condition here, with Substrata (still) remaining, 
 (Although) the current of Existence is destroyed; 
 But (the other Element) having the Substrata no (longer) 
 
 remaining, 
 Is future, in which state all creatures are wholly annihilated. 
 
 Those who, by having known this state which is uncom- 
 
 pounded, 
 Are emancipated in (their) thoughts, and those who have 
 
 destroyed 
 The current of Existence 1 these persons have attained the 
 
 quintessence of the Law, 
 And delight in Destruction. (Such as) they have abandoned 
 
 all Existences/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 45. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'Live, O monks, delighting in and delighted by the Recluse 
 Life (patisallana-) , examining into that-which-concerneth-the- 
 inner-self, 2 which hath tranquillity of thought, not rejecting 
 Meditation, 8 endowed with Discernment,* and exalting 5 
 
 1 Compare the note on ahara-netti in the preceding section. 
 
 2 ajjhattam, phonetically equivalent to Skt. adhy-atman-. Mrs. Rhys Davids 
 renders ' that which is self -evolved,' but expresses uncertainty as to the mean- 
 ing; see DhS. t intro., p. Ixxi, and 161, 673, 742-4, 1044. Tne word is often 
 contrasted with bahiram or bahiddha-, ' external, objective.' 
 
 *jhana-; for a full and excellent discussion of this important word, see 
 Mrs. Rhys Davids, DhS. 160, 165, 167, 170-5, 1098, 1281-7, and pp. 361-3. 
 
 *vipassana-; cf. Skt. vi-darsana-, and see Rhys Davids, Questions of King 
 Milinda, SEE. 35, p. 25. 
 
 *bruhet&-; I take this word to be a caus. ppl., corresponding to Skt. root 
 brnh-, ' to roar, to grow, increase ' ; caus. ' to nourish, to elevate.' At best 
 the rendering is unsatisfactory. 
 
- 46 ] TRANSLATION 59 
 
 in empty organs of sense. 1 Those who live delighting in and 
 delighted by the Recluse Life, examining into that- which-concerns- 
 the- inner-self, which has tranquillity of thought, not rejecting 
 Meditation, endowed with Discernment, and exalting in empty 
 organs of sense they are to expect one of two rewards, either 
 Knowledge in the visible world, or, if they have the Substrata 
 remaining, the (state of) Not-returning (anagamita-) (i. e. to 
 this existence)/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'Those who are good-minded, prudent, 
 Reflecting, and contemplative, 
 Who rightly discern the Law, 
 Nor look upon Lusts 
 
 Those good persons, taking delight 
 
 In zeal (appamada-), seeing danger 
 
 In pleasure (pamdda-), are not predestined (abhabba-) 
 
 To decrease (parihana-), e'en in the presence of Nirvana/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 46. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' Live, O monks, having the advantage 2 of learning, with 
 quintessence (sara-) of Emancipation (vimutti-), under good 
 influence. Those who live delighting in and delighted by the 
 advantage of learning, having higher wisdom, with quintessence 
 
 1 All MSS. read sunnagaranam, lit. ' of empty houses,' except C, which has 
 sunnakaranam, lit. ' of empty sense-organs.' The former reading seems to me 
 to be quite unsatisfactory, unless we are to twist its meaning by assigning to 
 it a metaphorical sense. I therefore follow the reading of C, sunnakaranam, 
 and compare Skt. karana-, * sense-organ.' This latter meaning can be brought 
 into connection with kamesu, ' lusts/ in line d below. For abl. use of the gen. 
 cf. Speyer, Sanskrit Syntax, 125. 
 
 *anisamsct-; this I analyze as equivalent to Skt. *a-ni-$ams-. This form 
 is not cited in Bohtlingk and Roth or in Bohtlingk, but is found in Sinhalese, 
 with the meaning ' gain, reward, profit.' 
 
6O ITI-VUTTAKA [ 46- 
 
 of Emancipation, under good influence they are to expect one 
 of two rewards, either knowledge in the visible world, or, if one 
 have the Substrata remaining, the (state of) Not-returning.' 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' One who is a novitiate-monk who hath not forsaken the 
 
 Law, 
 
 Who hath highest wisdom, and hath seen the end of the de- 
 struction of Birth 
 
 That one, verily, I proclaim to be a saint who hath put on 
 His final body, and who hath abandoned Pride, and passed 
 beyond Old Age. 
 
 Therefore, being always delighted by Contemplation, self- 
 
 controlled, and fervent, 
 Seeing the end of the destruction of Birth, 
 (Ye have), O monks, o'ercome Death with his army, 
 And ye are escaped from Birth and Death/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 47. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' A monk should live, O monks, watchful, thoughtful, mindful, 
 self -composed, cheerful (pamudita-) , both serene 1 under those 
 circumstances (tattha), and seeing the time 2 for good laws. 3 
 
 1 vippasanna-, Skt. *vi-pra-sad-. In Skt. only pra-sad- is found, meaning 
 'to calm, soothe, appease, propitiate.' The double prefix occurs in Sinhalese, 
 the verb having the meaning ' to please, delight, gratify.' 
 
 2 kala-vipassi- ; the second term of this compound is apparently used in 
 the sense of the simple form passati, ' to see,' and not in the sense of ' to 
 introspect ' as in 45, 4. Observe that vipassi- is here used to gloss pari- 
 vimamsamano in verse g below. The latter verb is used in the comm. on the 
 Dhp. verse 379, to gloss patimaseti, ' to explore, to search.' 
 
 8 Note the use of a plur. loc. to gloss the sing. ace. dhammam of verse 
 g below. The adj. kusalesu, ' good,' is used, we note, to gloss samma of 
 verse g, which word, however, is used adverbially, since it modifies not 
 dhammam, but the ppl. parivimamsamano. Note also the fact that line g, 
 
- 48 ] TRANSLATION 6 1 
 
 A monk that liveth watchful, thoughtful, mindful, self-composed, 
 O monks, cheerful, serene under those circumstances, seeing the 
 time for good laws he is to expect one of two rewards, either 
 knowledge in the visible world, or, if he have the Substrata 
 remaining, the (state of) Non-returning/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'Hearken unto this, ye watchful; 
 Whosoever of you be asleep, let him awake. 
 Watchfulness is better than sleep ; 
 The watchful one hath naught to fear. 
 
 And he that is watchful, heedful, mindful, 
 Self-composed, cheerful, and serene, 
 He rightly searcheth the Law, at the proper time 1 ; 
 Being concentrated 2 he may overcome darkness. 
 
 Therefore, in sooth, ye shall put darkness to flight. 
 (For) the fervent, prudent, contemplative monk, 
 Having cut the Fetters of Birth and Old Age, 
 May attain even here (in this world) Supreme Enlighten- 
 ment/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 48. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'There are, O monks, these two (kinds of) men who suffer 
 in the realm of punishment 3 and in perdition, because they have 
 
 kalena so samma dhammam parivitnamsamano, has fifteen syllables, although 
 it occurs in a Jagati stanza, consisting of verses of twelve syllables each. 
 These facts seem to me to prove that the verse is corrupt, and that it was not 
 understood by the commentator. 
 
 1 kalena (instr. case). This case in Skt. usually indicates 'in the course 
 of time, during a long time, after a long time.' 
 
 a ekodibhuto ; for a valuable discussion of this rare word, see Morris, 
 Notes and Queries, JPTS. 1885, p. 32 ff., and cf. Mrs. Rhys Davids, DhS. 161. 
 
 *apaya-; see Warren, Buddhism, p. 289-291. 
 
62 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 48 - 
 
 not forsaken this (sin).' * What two (kinds of men)?' 'The 
 religious student, 1 who, after taking his vows, does not preserve 
 his state of chastity, and (secondly) that one who, by his baseless 
 breaking of his religious vows (of chastity), causeth the fall 
 of one that is performing his religious vow with virtue and 
 purity (lit. his pure and virtuous vow)/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following: 
 
 ' He that speaketh falsehood goeth to perdition, 
 And he that, after having done, saith " I have not done " 
 These two are equal after death, 
 (For) in the other world they become men with evil deeds. 
 
 Many whose shoulders are covered 
 With the yellow gown, are ill-conditioned 
 And unrestrained; such evil-doers 
 By their evil deeds go to perdition. 
 
 Better would it be to swallow a heated iron ball, 
 Like flaring fire, than that a bad, 
 Unrestrained fellow should live 
 On the charity of the land/ 2 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 49. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' As to gods and men, O monks, circumscribed 3 by two varie- 
 ties of Belief, 4 some cleave to and some pass beyond 5 (Exist- 
 ence), and the wise behold (or, those with eyes see)/ 'How 
 
 1 brahmacart, ' one who has taken vows,' especially vows of Chastity. 
 a Same as 91 e-h, and Dhp. 308. 
 
 pariyutthita-, Skt. *pary-ud-sthita-. Childers translates ' arisen, possessed/ 
 This comp. does not appear in Skt. Bohtlingk and Roth translate pari-sthd- 
 as ' umstehen, hindern.' 
 
 'ditthi-, Skt. drsti-, lit. 'sight, speculation.' Mrs. Rhys Davids, DhS., 
 257, 258, 293, 325, 342, says "heresy" is a wrong translation of this word, 
 because there is ' sound or good ditthi-, as well as the contrary.' 
 
 * atidhavanti ; a Vedic word, RV. 9, 3, 2, and AV. 5, 8, 4. Bohtlingk and 
 Roth translate ' hinrinnen fiber, voriiberlaufen.' 
 
- 49 ] TRANSLATION 63 
 
 is it that some cleave ? ' ' As to Gods and men, O monks, de- 
 lighting in and delighted by Existence (bhava-), and overjoyed 
 thereby their mind, when the law for the destruction of Exist- 
 ence is pointed out, doth neither spring forward, nor is it placid, 
 neither is it settled, nor is it subject to propensity. Thus, verily, 
 some cleave (to Existence). 
 
 * " How is it that some pass beyond ? " Some, feeling re- 
 proach, 1 shame, and loathing for Existence, take delight in Ces- 
 sation of Existence (vibhava-). Since this substance (attha-), 
 Sir, 2 is destroyed and perisheth after the dissolution of the 
 body after death, and doth not exist after death, with the idea 
 that this (truth) is good, excellent, and seemly, certain (men) 
 pass beyond. 
 
 '"How is it that those with eyes see?" A monk here seeth 
 what is (bhutam) from what hath been (bhutato), and from this 
 he hath attained to disgust and aversion for Existence, and re- 
 pression of Existence. Thus it is, O monks, that those that 
 have eyes see/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Those having seen what is from what hath been, 
 And the means of passing beyond Existence 
 They, in very truth are emancipated 
 From the ruin caused by Thirst for Existence. 
 
 And if one have exact knowledge of Being, 
 And have quenched the Thirst for Existence and Non- 
 existence 
 
 This monk through Cessation of Existence 
 Attaineth not Rebirth/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 End of the second division 3 
 
 1 attiyamcina-, denom. of rti- t ' censure.' 
 
 3 Why the sing, bho, instead of the common bhikkhavet 
 
 8 Omitted by S. 
 
64 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 49 ~ 
 
 Resume 5 
 
 Two concerning the "senses" (28, 29) ; two on "painful" 
 
 (things) (30, 31); 
 The next two on Conduct ( 32, 33) ; 
 (A) froward (monk) (34)*; and two on Deception (35, 
 
 36) 2 ; 
 
 By cautious (37) 8 ; these ten. 
 
 Ideas ( 38) ; commandments ( 39) ; knowledge ( 40) ; 
 
 Wisdom (41) ; by the Law (42) ; (these) five 4 ; 
 
 The Unborn (43); Element (44) 5 ; (Sol-)itude (45) 6 ; 
 
 Learning (46) ; and by Watchfulness (47)*; 
 
 Realm of punishment (48) ; and by Belief (49). 8 
 
 These twenty-two are revealed. 
 
 FIRST CHAPTER OF THE THIRD DIVISION OF THE ITI-VUTTAKA 9 
 
 50. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' There are, O monks, these three sources of Impropriety 
 (akusala-): 'What three?' 'Desire, Hate and Delusion, O 
 monks, are sources of Impropriety; these, verily, O monks, are 
 the three sources of Impropriety. 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Desire, Hate, and Delusion, 
 Sprung from the mind, 
 
 1 We might rather expect the first word of the stanza, anBtapi, to be chosen. 
 
 8 The previous resume (see p. 50) has ' non-deception ' in this place. 
 
 'Note the sing, instead of the plur., the omission of the substantive, and 
 the instr. case metri gratia. 
 
 4 This word is a 'filler,' or device to give the line the requisite number 
 of syllables. 
 
 6 Notice the stem form dhatu-, instead of the nom. case. 
 
 The first four letters of the text word, patisalldnam, 'Solitude/ are 
 omitted. 
 
 7 Instr. case, metri gratia. 
 
 * Instr. case, metri gratia. 
 
 * This heading is inserted by S. 
 
- 51 ] TRANSLATION 65 
 
 Destroy the man of wicked thoughts, 
 Like a bamboo-tree 1 with its fruit/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 51. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 1 There are these three Elements (dhatu-), O monks/ 'What 
 three?' 'The Element of Form (rupa-), the Element of the 
 Absence of Form (arupa-), and the Element of Cessation 
 (nirodha-) ; these verily, O monks, are the three Elements/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'Those who, through the comprehension of the Element of 
 
 Form, 
 
 Are not stablished in formless things, 
 (And) who are emancipated through Cessation 
 These persons have abandoned death. 
 
 He that hath attained with his body 
 
 The immortal Element of getting-rid-of-the-Substrata (niru- 
 
 padhi-) 
 
 And who, free from Taint, 2 
 
 Hath experienced the getting-rid-of-the-Substrata 
 He, a Perfectly Enlightened One, pointeth out the Path 
 Which is without grief and free from Passion/ 
 
 1 tacasara-, Skt. tvacsara-, lit. ' best of barks/ 
 
 8 anasava-, Skt. ana-, neg. prefix, and asrava-, from root srQ-. Monier 
 Williams, Skt. Diet., s. v., says ' the Jainas use the word to denote the action 
 of the senses which impels the soul toward external objects.' It means ap- 
 parently both the impulse and the resultant contamination. Childers gives a 
 four-fold category of asavas, or 'taints,' viz., Lust, kama-; Existence, bhava-; 
 Belief, ditthi-; Ignorance, avijja-. 
 
 For a discussion of the word, see Mrs. Rhys Davids, DhS. 1096, and 
 Rhys Davids, Dial, of Buddha, p. 92. The word has been variously rendered, 
 
 * Deadly Floods,' ' Intoxicants,' ' Illusion (Wahn),' and ' Defilement (souillure).' 
 The rendering ' Taint ' or ' Contamination/ will perhaps best convey the mean- 
 ing. Compare other occurrences of the word in 38, 44, 56, 57, 59, 66, 67, 73, 
 96, 102, of this work. For a recurrence of these two stanzas see 73. 
 
 6 
 
66 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 5 2 ~ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 52. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'There are, O monks, these three feelings (vedana-}.' 'What 
 three?' 'Pleasant feelings, painful feelings, and feelings which 
 are neither pleasant nor painful. These verily, O monks, are the 
 three feelings/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' The self -composed, mindful, 
 And thoughtful disciple of Buddha, 
 Comprehendeth the feelings, 
 And the cause of the feelings, 
 
 And comprehendeth where they cease, 
 And the Path that leadeth to destruction (khaya-gamina-) . 
 By the destruction of (his) feelings, 
 This monk hath extinguished Hunger, 1 and hath attained 
 Nirvana/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 53. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' There are these three Feelings, O monks/ ' What three ? ' 
 ' Pleasant feelings, painful feelings, and feelings which are neither 
 pleasant nor painful. A pleasant feeling, O monks, is to be 
 recognized from (its) pain, a painful feeling from (its) pang 
 (sallato), (while) a feeling which is neither pleasant nor pain- 
 ful is to be recognized from (its) not lasting. 
 
 ' Since indeed, O monks, a pleasant feeling experienced by a 
 monk becometh recognized from its pain, and a painful feeling 
 becometh recognized from its pang, (and) a feeling which is 
 
 *nicchd,ta-; the comm. as cited by Windisch, glosses this word by nittanha-, 
 ' absence of Thirst.' It is probably from the rare Skt. root psS-, ' to hunger/ 
 with the privative prefix nir-, or nis-. The last four lines are identical with 
 the third stanza of 73. 
 
- 54 ] TRANSLATION 6/ 
 
 neither pleasant nor painful becometh recognized from (its) not 
 lasting that monk is called noble, O monks, and correct in his 
 views, one that hath eradicated Thirst, and one that causeth the 
 removal 1 of the Fetters; for his comprehension of rightful pur- 
 poses he hath made an end of Misery/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'Whatsoever monk hath recognized pleasure 
 From (its) pain, and pain from (its) pang, 
 And hath recognized from (its) not lasting, the presence 
 Of the (state) which is neither pleasant nor painful, 
 
 This monk verily hath proper vision (sanimadasa-) 
 Inasmuch as he is emancipated here (in this world) ; 
 If he be good and hath attained Insight, 
 He is a sage (muni-) that hath escaped the yoke (of earthly 
 existence) / 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 54. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' There are these three Cravings (esana-), O monks/ 'What 
 three?" 'The Craving for Lust, the Craving for Existence, and 
 the Craving for a life of chastity (brahmaccvriya-) . 2 These 
 verily, O monks, are the three Cravings/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' The self-composed, mindful, 
 And thoughtful disciple of Buddha, 
 Comprehendeth the Cravings, 
 And the cause of the Cravings, 
 
 *vivattayi; a caus. formation from root vrt-; lit. 'turning apart, aside,' 
 hence the idea of ' breaking.' 
 
 2 This curious passage apparently is to be taken as showing that all sorts 
 of ties, or clinging to earthly matters, whether good or bad, are wrong, and 
 as proving that complete detachment from the world is the Buddhist goal. 
 
68 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 54 ~ 
 
 And comprehended! where they cease, 
 And the Path that leadeth to their destruction. 
 By the destruction of (his) Cravings, 
 This monk hath extinguished Hunger, and hath attained 
 Nirvana/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 55. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'There are these three Cravings, O monks/ 'What three?' 
 ' The Craving for Lust, the Craving for Existence, and the Crav- 
 ing for a life of chastity. These verily, O monks, are the three 
 Cravings/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' The ascertainment of the truth that there is a Craving for 
 
 Lust, 
 A Craving for Existence, and a craving for the life of 
 
 chastity 
 
 (The ascertainment of this truth, I say) cometh 
 From a mass (samussaya-) of Subjects of Belief. 1 
 
 In the case of him that hath desisted from all Passion, 
 Who is released from the destruction 
 Caused by Thirst, the cravings are gotten rid of, 
 And the subjects of belief are removed. 
 By the destruction of (his) cravings 
 A monk becometh devoid of hope (nirasa-) and leaveth off 
 inquiry/ 2 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 1 ditthi-tthdna-, Skt. drsti-sthSna-, compounded with the following samus- 
 saya-. 
 
 2 The first of the above stanzas shows how the deduction is gained from a 
 mass of speculation, while the second stanza shows that when one has gained 
 this knowledge, he rises by its aid, and no longer has any need of speculation. 
 
- 57 ] TRANSLATION 69 
 
 56. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'There are these three Taints, 1 O monks.' 'What three?' 
 'The Taint of Lust, the Taint of Existence, and the Taint of 
 Ignorance. These verily, O monks, are the three Taints.' 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' The self -composed, mindful, 
 And thoughtful disciple of Buddha, 
 Comprehendeth the Taints, 
 And the cause of the Taints, 
 
 And comprehendeth where they cease, 
 
 And the Path that leadeth to their destruction. 
 
 By the destruction of (his) Taints, he 
 
 Hath extinguished Hunger, and hath attained Nirvana.' 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 57. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'There are these three Taints, O monks.' 'What three?' 
 'The Taint of Lust, the Taint of Existence, and the Taint of 
 Ignorance. These verily, O monks, are the three Taints.' 1 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' He that hath destroyed the* Taint 
 Of Lust, and who hath abandoned 
 Ignorance, and the Taint of Existence, 
 And who is freed and without the Substrata 
 Such a one hath conquered Mara (*. e. the Tempter) 
 With his elephant, and hath put on his final body.' 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 *See page 65, note 2. 
 
7O ITI-VUTTAKA [ $8 - 
 
 58. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'There are these three Thirsts, O monks/ 'What three?' 
 ' The Thirst for Lust, the Thirst for Existence, and the Thirst 
 for Non-existence. These verily, O monks, are the three Thirsts/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'Those creatures that are joined 
 To the yoke of Thirst, with minds 
 Impassioned by Existence and Non-existence 
 These men joined to the yoke of Mara, 
 And without Security (a-yogakkhema-) go to Transmigra- 
 tion, 
 To Birth and Death. 
 
 Whosoe'er abandon Thirst, (and are) 
 
 Without the Thirst for Existence or Non-existence 
 
 They (while) in the world have passed over (to the other 
 
 shore) ; 
 They acquire the destruction of the Taints/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 59. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'A monk that is endowed with three things, O monks, hath 
 escaped the realm of Mara, and shineth like the sun/ 'With 
 what three (things)?' 'Here (in this world) a monk becometh 
 endowed with the advanced Attribute (khanda-) of Character 
 (sila-), O monks, he becometh endowed with the advanced Attri- 
 bute of Contemplation (samadhi-), he becometh endowed with 
 the advanced Attribute of Wisdom (panna-) ; when endowed 
 with these three things, O monks, he hath passed beyond the 
 realm of Mara, and shineth like the sun/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
-60] TRANSLATION J I 
 
 ' He that is rightly inspired 1 
 In Character, Contemplation, and Wisdom, 
 Hath passed beyond the realm of Mara, 
 And shineth like the sun/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 [End of] First Chapter [of the third division] 
 
 Resume 6 
 Source and Element (50, 51); then two (on) Feelings 
 
 ( 52, 53) ; 
 And two (on) Cravings ( 54, 55) ; two (on) Taints ( 56, 
 
 57); 
 
 And from Thirst (58) 2 ; then from the realm of Mara 
 
 (59)- 2 
 (These), they say, (form) the first, last, and highest chapter. 3 
 
 60. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'There are, O monks, these three essentials (vatthu-) of vir- 
 tuous deeds (punna-kiriya-) .' 'What three?' 'The essentials 
 of virtuous deeds consisting of Charity (dana-), Character (sila-), 
 and Devotion (bhavana-). These verily, O monks, are the three 
 essentials/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'One should learn virtue 
 Which is of extensive goal, and (which hath) 
 The faculty* of Happiness ; 
 
 1 su-bhavita ; lit. ' Character, Contemplation, and Wisdom of whom these 
 are well-inspired.' 
 
 * Both of these words are put in the abl. case metri gratia. 
 
 8 It is to be noted that this resume is the only one of the eleven in the 
 book which is written in the tristubh meter, . e. in lines of eleven syllables 
 each. 
 
 4 indriya-; consult Childers, Pali Diet., s. v., for the five ' faculties ' of hap- 
 piness, misery, enjoyment, grief, and indifference. ' Faculty ' is the rendering 
 
72 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 60 - 
 
 And one should devote oneself 
 
 To Charity, to tranquil behavior (samacariya-) 
 
 And to thoughts of Friendship. 
 
 Having devoted himself to these three virtues, 
 Which provide reason for happiness, 
 A wise man gaineth the world of Happiness 
 A world all free from distress/ 1 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 61. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'There are these three Eyes (cakkhu-), O monks/ 'What 
 three ? ' ' The natural eye, the divine eye, and the eye of Wisdom. 
 These are the three eyes, O monks/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'The natural eye, the divine eye, 
 The eye of Wisdom preeminently 
 These three eyes 
 The Excellent One hath proclaimed. 
 
 The birth 145 of the natural eye 
 (Is) the path of the divine eye, 
 Inasmuch as knowledge was born 2 
 As the eye of wisdom. 
 By the attainment of this eye 
 One is released from all Misery/ 
 
 adopted by Mrs. Rhys Davids, DhS. 66 1, 709, 971 ; I follow that rendering 
 here and in the identical stanzas in 22, but elsewhere I have translated as 
 ' sense.' 
 
 x This poetical section seems to have no direct connection with the prose 
 portion above ; the same two stanzas occur also in 22, where similarly they 
 have no connection with the prose portion of the same section. As the two 
 stanzas offer no especial difficulty to the translator, it may be assumed, I think, 
 that both 22, and this section, 60, are either later additions to the text of 
 the Iti-vuttaka, or else represent a rearrangement of the text. 
 
 a uppada-, Skt. t-pad-, * to arise, to be born, to come into existence.' 
 
- 62 ] TRANSLATION 73 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 62. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'There are these three senses, 1 O monks/ 'What three?' 
 ' The sense (which says) : " I shall know that which is not 
 known " 2 ; the sense of knowledge (anna-) ; the sense of having 
 thoroughly known. 8 These are the three senses, O monks/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Of a novitiate-monk who is under religious training, 4 
 Who is following the straight path his first understanding 
 
 (nana-) 
 
 Lieth in (the doctrine of) Destruction; 
 Therefore Knowledge (anna-) is (his) neighbor. 
 
 Of such a one as is released by Knowledge (anna-), there- 
 fore, 
 
 There is the Understanding (nana-) : 
 " I have genuine (akuppa-) Emancipation 
 From the destruction caused by the Fetters of Existence." 
 
 That good man, verily, who is possessed of his senses, 8 
 Who is delighted in the condition of Repose (santi-pada-) , 
 
 1 See page 71, note 4. 
 
 2 I analyze this compound into anannatam, annassami, iti, indriyam. 
 
 8 annatavindriyam ; the former part of this compound is annSta- plus the 
 suffix -avin, for which see Whitney, Skt. Gram., 1232. These three 'senses,' 
 or ' faculties,' are evidently knowledge as to the future, the present, and the 
 past. Incidentally compare the Buddhist order of words, differing from the 
 usual English order of past, present, and future. Compare 63, following. 
 
 * sikkhamana-, ppl. from root siks- t from which comes also the word 
 sekkha-, ' novitiate-monk,' in the line above. 
 
 8 This passage is apparently in curious contrast to the narrower meaning 
 of indriya-, 'organ of sense,' as exemplified in 28, 29. The word is here 
 taken evidently in the more philosophical meaning of 'faculty,' which are 
 enumerated (see Mrs. Rhys Davids, DhS. 971-3) as 'vision, hearing, smell, 
 taste, body-sensibility, femininity, masculinity, and vitality.' At best the 
 passage is somewhat unsatisfactory. We should expect rather: 'One who 
 thoroughly comprehends the senses,' as in the Dlgha Nikaya, Pali Text Soc. 
 edition, sutta 22, as translated by Warren, Buddhism, p. 366. 
 
74 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 62 - 
 
 Putteth on his final body, (for he) 
 Hath conquered Mara with his elephant. 1 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 63. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 2 
 
 ' There are these three times, 8 O monks/ 'What three?' 
 ' Time which has passed, time which has not arrived (*'. e. 
 future), and time which is present. 4 These are the three times, 
 O monks/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Creatures that believe in 5 the Indestructible, 6 
 
 1 sa-vahana- ; lit. 'with his vehicle.' 
 
 2 It is with great diffidence that I attempt to translate this section, as I 
 have found it well-nigh impossible to glean any connected or intelligent sequence 
 from the following lines. 
 
 9 addha-; I take this word to be equivalent to the Skt. adhvan-, 'road, 
 distance, time.' The writer of the above very brief prose introduction to this 
 section has not, I feel sure, himself fully understood the meaning of the fol- 
 lowing stanzas. The only possible connection to be discerned between the 
 prose and the poetry is precisely this rare and somewhat doubtful word addha-. 
 The only word in the stanzas to which this word can possibly refer is to 
 akkheyya, on which see my note below. Aside from this single problematical 
 rapport, there is not the slightest light thrown by this prose passage on the 
 stanzas which follow. 
 
 * For the characteristic order of past, future, and present see 62 preced- 
 ing, note 3, and compare 78. 
 
 8 sannino ; I compare this with Skt. sam-jna-, which Bohtlingk and Roth 
 define as ' glaubend an ' 
 
 8 akkheyya- ; this word presents great difficulty. I have translated it as 
 if it were equivalent to Sanskrit a-kseya-, a guna formation from the root 
 ksi-, ' to kill, to destroy.' Of this, however, I feel by no means sure. An- 
 other possibility is that the Pali term may be equivalent to Skt. akhya- plus the 
 suffix tya (for this suffix cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram., 1215 a, b, where he cites 
 parvatlya, ' mountainous ') ; this Sanskrit word akhya- is itself extremely rare, 
 being cited only once in Bohtlingk and Roth (' Zeitdauer '). A plausible 
 argument for this rendering of the Pali term is afforded by the occurrence 
 of addha, ' time,' in the prose above. Still a third possibility is that it may 
 equal Skt. akhyeya-, * what ought to be proclaimed,' from the root khya-, ' to 
 tell.' Force is given to this third interpretation by the occurrence of the word 
 akkatara-, ' teacher,' i. e. ' one who tells,' in line f. 
 
-64] TRANSLATION 75 
 
 That are established in (patitthita-) the Indestructible 
 Without Thorough Knowledge (a-parinna-) of the Inde- 
 structible, 
 Go to the Bond of Death. 
 
 And by having Thorough Knowledge of the Indestructible, 
 
 (a person) 
 
 Doth not think of it as his leader (akkhatara) (lit. teacher), 
 And by his mind (manasd) he hath attained 
 Release (vimokkha-), the incomparable condition of Repose. 
 
 This one, verily, possessed of the Indestructible, 
 
 Upright (santa-), being delighted by the Condition of 
 
 Repose, 
 
 Worshipping 1 wisely, 2 and abiding in the Law, 
 He is not accounted as a Veda-student/ 3 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 64. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'There are these three evil actions (duccarita-) , O monks/ 
 ' What three ? ' ' The evil actions of the body, word, and 
 thought. 4 These are the three evil actions, O monks/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'He that hath committed 
 Any evil action of body, 
 Word, or thought, or any other action 
 
 *sevi-; lit. 'following, serving/ 
 
 2 sankhaya; I take this as an abl. case of Skt. samkhyS-, 'enumeration, 
 reckoning, calculation ; a number, numeral ; reason, understanding, intellect ; 
 deliberation, reflection.' Childers cites this adverbial usage. 
 
 8 The last verse of the Pali reads: sankham nopeti vedagu, lit. 'he does 
 not come into account as a Veda student ' probably a blow at the brahmans. 
 
 * manas-; here, and in similar passage enumerating this threefold division 
 of good or evil acts, I have rendered manas- as ' thought,' owing to the 
 common English phrase ' deed, word, and thought,' but have in other places 
 translated the same word manas- as ' mind.' 
 
76 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 64 - 
 
 Called a crime; or who 
 Hath not done any good action, 
 But hath done much evil 
 After the dissolution of the body 
 This unwise one goeth to perdition.' 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 65. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' There are these three good actions, O monks/ ' What three ? ' 
 * The good actions of body, word, and thought. These are the 
 three good actions, O monks/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'He that hath abandoned 
 Evil actions of body, 
 Word, and thought, and all other actions 
 Called criminal; and who 
 
 Hath not done any improper action, 
 But hath done much that is proper 
 After the dissolution of the body 
 This wise one goeth to heaven/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 66. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' There are these three purifications, 1 O monks/ ' What 
 three?' 'The purifications of body, word, and thought. These 
 are the three purifications, O monks/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'He that is pure in body, word, and thought (cetas-), 
 And free from taint, 2 possessed of 
 
 *socceyya-, Skt. sauca-, plus suffix -lya, see Whitney, Skt. Gram., 1216. 
 J See page 65, note 2. 
 
- 68 ] TRANSLATION 77 
 
 Purity and purification 
 
 He, they say, hath abandoned all.' 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 67. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'There are these three silences, 1 O monks/ 'What three?' 
 ' The silences of body, word, and thought. These are the three 
 silences, O monks/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' He that is silent in body, word, and thought (manas-), 
 Free from taint, (and) possessed of 
 The quality of silence of a Muni (muni-moneyya-) 
 He, they say, hath washed away 2 his sin/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 68. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'Whoso, O monks, hath not abandoned Passion, Hate, and 
 Delusion 3 he is called Mara's bond, Mara's snare for the un- 
 liberated one,* and one that must act according to the will of 
 a sinful man. 
 
 'Whoso, O monks, hath abandoned Passion, Hate, and Delu- 
 sion he is not called Mara's bond, (he is not called) Mara's 
 snare for the liberated one, 5 or one that must act according to 
 the will of a sinful man/ 
 
 *moneyya-, Skt. mauna-, 'taciturnity/ The word is connected with the 
 term muni, ' an ascetic, a sage,' whose great duty is silence. 
 
 z ninhata-; I derive this word from nis-, or nih-, plus the root snS- } 'to 
 bathe, wash.' This particular compound form is not found in Sanskrit. I 
 assume a modification of the first sibilant, as sn in Skt. regularly corresponds 
 to nh in Pali. 
 
 8 moha-, glossing avijjS-, ' ignorance/ in verse b below. 
 
 * patimukkassa, contrasted with oramukkassa, ' liberated/ below. 
 
 5 Observe the curious litotes : ' the liberated one hath no snare of Mara/ 
 
?8 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 68 - 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' He that hath renounced Passion, Hate, and Ignorance 
 This man, they say, is one whose soul is increased, 
 One that hath become a Brahma, a Consummate One, 
 A Buddha, having passed beyond enmity and fear, and having 
 abandoned all/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 69. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 * That monk or nun, 1 that hath not abandoned Passion, Hate, 
 and Delusion, O monks, is said not to have crossed the Ocean, 
 with its waves and its billows, with its whirlpools, sharks, 2 and 
 demons (rakkhasa-) . But whatsoever monk hath abandoned 
 Passion, Hate, and Delusion, is said to have crossed the Ocean 
 with its waves and its billows, with its whirlpools, sharks, and 
 demons, and when he hath crossed over and gone to the other 
 shore, he standeth on the dry land of Brahma/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' He that hath renounced Passion, Hate and Ignorance, 
 Hath crossed o'er the Ocean, 
 
 With its sharks and its demons, with its danger from waves, 
 And (which is) difficult of crossing. 
 
 He that hath got rid of the Substrata and abandoned Death, 
 That hath escaped Misery through not being born again 
 He, when dead (lit. gone home), goeth not to similar (Exist- 
 ence) 
 
 Him I call a king of Death (maccu-raja-) , (gone) beyond 
 Delusion/ 
 
 1 bhikkhunt- ; the only time that a nun is mentioned in this work. The 
 only other feminine touch is in 42 preceding. 
 
 2 gaha-, Skt. graha-. In Skt. the same word has also the meaning 'croco- 
 dile.' Compare a similar passage in 109. 
 
- 69 ] TRANSLATION 79 
 
 [End of] Second Chapter [i. e. of the third division] 
 
 Resume 7 
 
 Virtue (60); the eye (6i) 1 ; then the sens(es) (62) 2 ; 
 "Times" (63); two on action (64, 6s) 3 ; pure (66) 4 ; 
 Silen(ces) (67) 5 ; then two on Passion (68, 69). 
 These, moreover, they say, (form) the highest (uttama-) sec- 
 ond chapter. 7 
 
 70. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so 'I have heard. 
 
 'Those creatures seen by me, O monks, who are attended by 
 evil actions of body, word, or thought, who speak ill of the noble 
 ones, holding Wrong Belief, 8 taking on themselves the deeds of 
 Wrong Belief such persons, after the dissolution of the body 
 after death, go to punishment, misfortune, torture, and perdition. 
 
 ' Now, not having heard this (truth) proclaimed by anyone 
 else, whether devotee or brahman, I say : " Those creatures 
 seen by me, O monks, who are attended by evil actions of body, 
 word, and thought, who speak ill of the noble ones, holding 
 Wrong Belief, taking on themselves the deeds of Wrong Belief 
 such persons, after the dissolution of the body after death, go 
 to punishment, misfortune, torture, and perdition." 
 
 ' And furthermore, since this is entirely 9 understood, seen, 
 and known, for that reason I say : " Those creatures seen by me, 
 O monks, who are attended by evil actions of body, word, and 
 
 1 Observe the stem form. , 
 
 *In order to keep within the eight syllables of the verse, the last word of 
 this line of the resume is apocopated into indriya-, instead of indriyani of the 
 text. This shortened form may be, however, comparable to the Vedic plural, 
 see Whitney, Skt. Gram., 331 c, and cf. Fausboll, Sutta Nipata, SEE. 10, 
 p. xii. 
 
 8 Remark the singular caritam, instead of the plural caritani. 
 
 * Remark the simple adj. instead of the abstract soceyya- of the text. 
 *mune instead of moneyyani of the text. 
 
 8 All MSS. agree in having the stem form raga- instead of the nom. rago. 
 
 7 The fourth line of this resume has four extra syllables. 
 
 8 ditthi-; see note on 49. 
 
 * sama- ; an unusual word. Probably equivalent to Avestan homo- ; cf. 
 Bartholomae, Altiranisches Worterbuch, s. v. 
 
80 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 70 - 
 
 thought, who speak ill of the noble ones, holding Wrong Belief, 
 taking on themselves the deeds of Wrong Belief such persons, 
 after the dissolution of the body after death, go to punishment, 
 misfortune, torture, and perdition." ' 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'That individual here (in this world) 
 Who reflecteth wrong thoughts, 1 
 Who uttereth wrong words, 
 Who doeth wrong deeds with his body, 
 
 Who is ignorant and wicked 
 Here in this brief life (he), 
 After the dissolution of the body, 
 Goeth to perdition.' 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 71. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'Those creatures seen by me, O monks, who are attended by 
 good actions of body, word, and thought, who speak no ill of 
 the noble ones, holding Right Belief, taking on themselves the 
 deeds of Right Belief such persons, after the dissolution of the 
 body after death, go to felicity and heaven. 
 
 ' Now, not having heard this (truth) proclaimed by anyone 
 else, whether devotee or brahman, I say : " Those creatures seen 
 by me, O monks, who are attended by good actions of body, 
 word, and thought, who speak no ill of the noble ones, holding 
 Right Belief, taking on themselves the deeds of Right Belief 
 such persons, after the dissolution of the body after death, go to 
 felicity and heaven." 
 
 'And furthermore, since this is entirely understood, seen, and 
 known, for that reason, I say: "Those creatures seen by me, 
 O monks, who are attended by good actions of body, word, and 
 thought, who speak no ill of the noble ones, holding Right Belief, 
 
 1 Literally manas-, ' mind.' 
 
- 72 ] TRANSLATION 8 1 
 
 taking on themselves the deeds of Right Belief such persons, 
 after the dissolution of the body after death, go to felicity and 
 heaven." ' 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 'That individual here (in this world) 
 Who reflecteth right thoughts, 
 Who uttereth right words, 
 Who doeth right acts with his body, 
 
 Who is learned and virtuous 
 Here in this brief life (he), 
 After the dissolution of the body, 
 Goeth to heaven/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 72. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'There are, O monks, these three Elements (dhatu-) of De- 
 liverance (nissorewa-) .' 'What three?' 'Deliverance from the 
 Passions, namely, Separation (nekkhamma-) (i. e. from the 
 world) ; the Deliverance from Form (rupa-), namely Formless- 
 ness; the Deliverance from that which has had Existence, which 
 is compounded (and) subject to the Chain of Causation (paticca- 
 samuppanna-) , namely, Cessation (nirodha-).' 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' The ever- fervent one that knoweth 
 The Deliverance from Passion, 
 And (the way of) passing beyond Forms, 
 And attaineth tranquillity of all the Aggregates 
 
 This monk, verily, hath proper vision (sammaddasa-) , 
 Inasmuch as he is emaciated here (in this world) ; 
 If he be good and hath attained Insight, 
 
 7 
 
82 ITI-VUTTAKA [ J2 - 
 
 \ 
 
 He verily is a sage (muni-) that hath escaped the yoke (of 
 earthly existence)/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 73. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 1 Those (people) that are (liberated) from Form, O monks, 
 are better than (people still attached to) Form; Cessation is 
 (even) better than (the state of individuals who are attached to) 
 Form/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Those creatures that go to Form (rupa-upa-gam-) , 
 And those that live without Form, 
 Do not comprehend Cessation, 
 Since they go to Re-existence. 
 
 And those, who, by their comprehension of Forms, 
 Are not stablished in formless things, 
 (And) who are emancipated through Cessation 
 These persons have abandoned death. 
 
 He that hath attained with his body 
 
 The immortal Element (dhatu-) of getting-rid-of-the-Sub- 
 
 strata (nir&padhi-) , 
 And who, free from Taint, 1 
 
 Hath experienced the getting-rid-of-the-Substrata 
 He, a Perfectly Enlightened One, pointeth out the Path 
 Which is without grief and free from passion/ 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 74. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' There are these three (kinds of) sons, O monks, to be found 
 
 1 See page 65, note 2. 
 
- 74 ] TRANSLATION 83 
 
 living in the world/ ' What three ? ' ' Superior-born, equal- 
 born, and inferior-born. 1 
 
 * In what way, O monks, doth a son become superior-born ? 
 There exist here (in this world), O monks, parents who have 
 not gone to the Refuge of the Buddha, who have not gone to the 
 Refuge of the Law, who have not gone to the Refuge of the 
 Order, who do not abstain 2 from maltreating living creatures, 
 who do not abstain from not giving gifts, 3 who do not abstain 
 from fornication, 4 who do not abstain from falsehood, who do 
 not abstain from the state of sloth (characteristic) of a drinker 
 of liquor and spirits, who are immoral; of them there is born 
 a son that goeth to the Refuge of the Buddha, that goeth to 
 the Refuge of the Law, that goeth to the Refuge of the Order, 
 who abstaineth from maltreating living creatures, who abstain- 
 eth from not giving gifts, who abstaineth from fornication, who 
 abstaineth from falsehood, who abstaineth from the state of 
 sloth (characteristic) of a drinker of liquor and spirits, who 
 is moral and righteous: thus, verily, O monks, is born a 
 superior son. 
 
 ' In what way, O monks, doth a son become equal-born ? 
 There exist parents here (in this world), O monks, who have 
 gone to the Refuge of the Buddha, who have gone to the Refuge 
 of the Law, who have gone to the Refuge of the Order, who 
 abstain from maltreating living creatures, who abstain from not 
 giving gifts, who abstain from fornication, who abstain from 
 falsehood, who abstain from the state of sloth (characteristic) 
 of a drinker of liquor and spirits, who are moral and righteous; 
 of them there is born a son that goeth to the Refuge of the 
 Buddha, that goeth to the Refuge of the Law, that goeth to the 
 Refuge of the Order, who abstaineth from maltreating living 
 creatures, who abstaineth from not giving gifts, who abstaineth 
 from fornication, who abstaineth from falsehood, who abstaineth 
 
 1 ati-, anu-, ava-jata-. 
 
 *atipata-; see Monier Williams, Sanskrit Dictionary, s. v. 
 
 8 Notice the double negative instead of the positive. 
 
 4 Literally, ' wrong conduct in love affairs/ 
 
84 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 74 ~ 
 
 from the state of sloth (characteristic) of a drinker of liquor 
 and spirits, who is moral and righteous: thus, verily, O monks, 
 is born an equal son. 
 
 ' In what way, O monks, doth a son become inferior-born. There 
 exist parents here (in this world), O monks, who have gone to 
 the Refuge of the Buddha, who have gone to the Refuge of the 
 Law, who have gone to the Refuge of the Order, who abstain 
 from maltreating living creatures, who abstain from not giving 
 gifts, who abstain from fornication, who abstain from falsehood, 
 who abstain from the state of sloth (characteristic) of a drinker 
 of liquor and spirits, who are moral and righteous ; of them there 
 is born a son that doth not go to the Refuge of the Buddha, 
 that doth not go to the Refuge of the Law, that doth not go to 
 the Refuge of the Order, who doth not abstain from maltreating 
 living creatures, who doth abstain from giving gifts, who doth 
 not abstain from fornication, who doth not abstain from the state 
 of sloth (characteristic) of a drinker of liquor and spirits, who 
 is immoral and wicked : this, verily, O monks, is born an inferior 
 son. These are the three (kinds of) sons, O monks, to be found 
 living in the world/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' The wise desire a son superior 
 Or equal; they desire not 
 An inferior-born son 
 Who injureth the family. 
 
 Those sons who in the world become 
 Followers (of Buddha), who are endowed 
 With a faithful character, bountiful, 1 unselfish 
 May the moon, detached from the mass of clouds, shine 
 upon them/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 1 vadannil-, Skt. vadanya-. 
 
- 75 ] TRANSLATION 8 5 
 
 75. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' There are found these three (kinds of) individuals living in 
 the world, O monks/ 'What three?' 'One that is like unto 
 a lack of rain, one that giveth rain over a district, and one that 
 giveth rain everywhere. How doth an individual, O monks, 
 become like unto a lack of rain? An individual here becometh 
 not a giver of all things, namely, (the articles) food, drink, 
 clothing, conveyance, garlands, perfumes, unguents, bed, lodging, 
 and light, to devotees, brahmans, beggars, wayfarers, and indi- 
 gent people thus, forsooth, O monks, an individual becometh 
 like unto a lack of rain. 
 
 ' How doth an individual, O monks, become like unto one that 
 giveth rain over a district ? An individual here becometh a giver 
 of certain things, but of certain other things he becometh not a 
 giver, namely, (the articles) food, drink, clothing, conveyance, 
 garlands, perfumes, unguents, bed, lodging and light, to devotees, 
 brahmans, beggars, wayfarers and indigent people thus, for- 
 sooth, O monks, an individual becometh like unto one that giveth 
 rain over a district. 
 
 ' How doth an individual, O monks, become like unto one that 
 giveth rain everywhere? An individual here giveth 1 of all 
 things, namely, (the articles), food, drink, clothing, conveyance, 
 garlands, perfumes, unguents, bed, lodging, and light, to devotees, 
 brahmans, beggars, wayfarers, and indigent people thus, for- 
 sooth, O monks, an individual becometh like unto one that giveth 
 rain over a district. 
 
 ' These verily, O monks, are the three (kinds of) individuals 
 found living in the world/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 1 Observe the changed locution. Above in this same passage, it was the 
 noun data-, ' a giver ' ; here it is the verb deti, ' to give.' The latter may 
 correspond to the Skt. root day-, ' to share,' or to the root i da-, ' to give,' or 
 possibly to 2 da-, ' to divide, to share.' There are no MS. variants. 
 
86 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 75~ 
 
 ' He (that) distributeth not 
 That which he hath received 
 His food, his drink, his sustenance 
 Unto devotee, brahman, beggar, wayfarer 
 Such a low man as he, they say, is like 
 Unto a lack of rain. 
 
 He that is giver of certain things, 
 Of certain giving not * 
 Such as he, so say the wise, 
 Sheddeth rain over a district. 
 
 A man that doth promise 2 plenteous alms, 
 Compassionate to all creatures, 
 Scattereth wide (his bounty) with joy and pride, 3 
 And saith: "Share, share* (with me)." 
 
 Like unto a cloud that roareth, 
 
 And thundereth, 
 
 And giveth forth rain, 
 
 And filleth the heights and the depths 
 
 With its drenching waters 
 
 Such here on earth is that man. 5 
 
 When he hath toilfully 6 acquired 
 Wealth attained by lawful means 
 He satisfieth with food and drink 
 The worthy (sammd) wayfarers. 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 1 pavecchati ; a rare word equiv. to Skt. pra-r-, or rch-, 'to go forth/ in 
 the caus. ' to send, to give.' For the euphonic v before i, e, u, see Franke, 
 Pali und Sanskrit, p. 101. 
 
 * subhikkhavaca-, lit. ' with assurance of good provisions.' 
 
 * Remark that mana- may in Pali, as in Sanskrit, be used in a good, as 
 well as in a bad, sense. 
 
 4 detha ; an imper. 26. pi., from either i dS- t ' to give/ or from 2 d&-, ' to 
 divide, to share.' 
 
 8 Rather an anticlimax ! 
 
 *utthana-, Skt. ut-sthana-, lit. 'rising.' In Apte, Skt. Diet., s. v., the 
 fourth definition is ' effort, exertion.' 
 
- 76 ] TRANSLATION 8/ 
 
 76. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'A man should preserve his character (slla-), O monks, by 
 seeking three (kinds of) Happiness/ 'What three?' 'He 
 should preserve his character by thinking : " Let praise come to 
 me " ; he should preserve his character by thinking : " Let wealth 
 fall to my lot"; he should preserve his character by thinking: 
 " I shall go after the dissolution of the body after death, to 
 felicity, to the heavenly world (sagga-loka-) ." A wise man 
 should preserve his character, O monks, by seeking these three 
 (kinds of) Happiness/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' A wise man may preserve his character 
 If he seek three (kinds of) Happiness, namely, 
 Praise, the getting of treasure, 
 And, when dead, joy in heaven. 
 
 But if, though not doing evil himself, 
 He attendeth on one that doth evil, 
 He becometh suspected 1 of evil, 2 
 And his ill-repute increaseth. 
 
 As is the friend whom one maketh, 
 
 As is the friend on whom one attendeth, 
 
 Such a one doth he himself become. 
 
 Of such is the nature of Association (sahavasa-). 
 
 As the poisoned shaft besmeareth the unsmirched quiver, 
 Just so one comrade (influenceth) another comrade, 
 And the toucher the touched. 
 Thus from fear of being smirched 
 A steadfast man should not be 
 An evil man's companion. 
 
 1 samkiya-; not in Childers. I should compare the word with Skt. tank-, 
 ' to doubt ; to imagine, fancy.' 
 
 2 For this use of the loc. case see Speyer, Sanskrit Syntax, p. 109. 
 
88 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 76 - 
 
 Like unto a man that wrappeth up 
 
 A stinking fish in Kusa 1 grass, 
 
 And the grass giveth forth a stinking savor 
 
 Like unto him are those that attend on fools (bdlu-). 
 
 And like unto a man that wrappeth 
 
 A (morsel of the fragrant) Tagara 2 within a petal, 3 
 
 And the leaves give forth a pleasant savor 
 
 Like unto him are those that attend the steadfast. 
 
 Hence if he know the contents* 
 
 Of his own leaf -basket, 5 
 
 The wise man should not serve the wicked, 
 
 But should serve the good, 
 
 For the wicked lead (one) to perdition, 
 
 But the good cause (one) to attain felicity/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 77. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'That this body is undergoing decomposition, O monks, is 
 the Law of the change of Intellections 6 ; that all the Substrata 
 are transitory (and cause) misery, is the Law of Transformation/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 1 Poa cynosuroides, a sacred grass used at certain religious ceremonies. 
 
 a Tabernae montana coronaria, a fragrant plant. 
 
 8 Patasa-; we should expect patta-, ' leaf,' to be used a second time. 
 
 *I follow the MSS. B, D, E, and S in reading sampaka. This means 
 literally 'cooking, or ripening thoroughly' (Monier Williams). The word 
 also designates a plant, viz., the Cathartocarpus Fistula. 
 
 * pal3sa-puta- ; this may be a reference to the pitakas, or 'baskets,' of 
 tradition, the well-known designation of the three divisions of the Buddhist 
 canon. 
 
 *vinnana-; this word is discussed by Mrs. Rhys Davids, DhS. 16, 202, 
 484, 1008, 1156. 
 
- 78 ] TRANSLATION 89 
 
 ' Knowing both (the fact) that the body 
 Is undergoing decomposition, and that the Intellections 
 
 are breaking up, 1 
 (The man) of perfected mind, that hath seen peril in 
 
 the Substrata, 
 
 And learned 2 Birth and Death- 
 He hath attained unto the highest Repose, 
 And longeth for his time to come.' 8 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 78. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 'This is a fundamental principle, O monks, that creatures 
 mingle and unite together with creatures, the base-disposed with 
 the base-disposed, and the well-disposed with the well-disposed. 
 
 ' In past time it was a fundamental principle that creatures 
 have mingled and united together with creatures, the base-dis- 
 posed with the base-disposed, and the well-disposed with the well- 
 disposed. 
 
 ' In future time it will be a fundamental principle that creatures 
 will mingle and unite together with creatures, the base-disposed 
 with the base-disposed, and the well-disposed with the well- 
 disposed. 
 
 'At the present time it is now a fundamental principle that 
 creatures do mingle and unite with creatures, the base-disposed 
 with the base-disposed, and the well-disposed with the well- 
 disposed/ 4 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 1 The best MS., namely M, it may be noted, reads veragunam, which is not 
 clear to me. I follow the MSS. D, E, and S in reading pabhangunam. 
 
 'ajjhaga; an aor. of adhi-gam-, used as an aor. of adhlte, 'to repeat, to 
 go over,' hence ' to study.' 
 
 * kala-, a synonym of death. 
 
 * For the Buddhistic order of ' past, future, and present,' see note on 62 
 and cf. 63. 
 
QO ITI-VUTTAKA [ 78 - 
 
 ' The undergrowth 1 of the forest (of Lust) is born from 
 
 Contact (samsagga-) 
 And perisheth from lack of Association. 
 Just as one that hath climbed upon a small 2 piece of wood, 
 Would sink in the great sea, 
 So doth even the man of holy life sink 
 When he approacheth an indolent person. 
 
 Therefore, forsaking the indolent person 
 With enfeebled strength, 
 Let one live with wise men 
 Who are in retreat (and) noble, 
 With minds intent, meditative, 
 Ever undertaking manly deeds/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 79. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' These three things, O monks, conduce to the deterioration of 
 a monk who is a novitiate/ * What three ? ' 'A monk becometh 
 here (in this world) delighting in and delighted by activity, 8 
 O monks, and addicted to the delight of activity; he becometh 
 delighting in and delighted by conversation and addicted to the 
 delight of conversation ; he becometh delighting in and delighted 
 by sleep, and addicted to the delight of sleep. These, O monks, 
 are the three things which conduce to the deterioration of a 
 monk who is a novitiate. 
 
 ' These three things, O monks, conduce to the non-deterioration 
 of a monk who is a novitiate/ 'What three?' 'A monk be- 
 cometh not here (in this world) delighting in and delighted by 
 
 1 vanatha-; literally the word means 'forest-standing/ and hence 'under- 
 growth.' In Skt. the term is used to designate ' hermit, ascetic.' For the use 
 of this word in the category of ' Lust/ see Mrs. Rhys Davids, DhS. 5 1059. 
 See Dhammapada, w. 283, 284, 344. 
 
 a paritta- ; Skt. pari-dH-, for which see P&nini, 5. 3. 124. In Sanskrit this 
 rare word has the meaning ' to circumscribe, to limit.' 
 
 *kamma-; there is here manifestly no idea of the Karma doctrine. 
 
- 79 ] TRANSLATION gi 
 
 activity and becometh not addicted to the delight of activity; 
 he becometh not delighting in and delighted by conversation, 
 and becometh not addicted to the delight of conversation; he 
 becometh not delighting in and delighted by sleep, and becometh 
 not addicted to the delight of sleep. These, O monks, are the 
 three things which conduce to the non-deterioration of a monk 
 who is a novitiate/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Such a monk as delighteth in activity 
 As is delighted by conversation and delighteth 
 In sleep, and is puffed up (uddhata-), 
 Cannot attain Supreme Enlightenment. 
 
 Therefore, verily, one should be 
 
 With few obligations, 
 
 With slight slumber, and not puffed up ; 
 
 Such a monk can attain Supreme Enlightenment.' 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 [End of the] Third Chapter [i. e. of the third division] 
 
 Resume 8 
 Two on Belief (70, 71 ) x ; Deliverance (72); Form 
 
 (73) 2 ; 
 A "son" (74) 2 ; and by "one that doth not give rain" 
 
 (75); 
 
 1 The writer of the resume has totally misunderstood this passage. He 
 should not have written ditthi-, ' Belief/ but dittha a passive past ppl. of drt-, 
 ' to see.' The important word, at any rate, is not this verb ' to see,' but the 
 term kayaduccarita- in the same line of the text. Compare the resume of 
 81, found after 89 in this translation. This section begins in just the same 
 way as 70, 71, but in this latter resume the important word sakkarena, ' own 
 affairs,' is correctly given. It is, however, to be noted that this difference may 
 have been caused by the metrical position of the respective words in the verses 
 of the two resumes. 
 
 * In the former case the sing, instead of the plur. is used, in the latter 
 case the plur. is used instead of the sing. 
 
92 ITI-VUTTAKA f 80 - 
 
 Happi (nesses) (76)*; and Dissolution (77) ; and Element 
 
 (78); 
 
 By Deterioration ( 79) *; these ten. 
 
 80. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' There are, O monks, these three improper Ideas.' 
 ' What three ? ' ' The improper Idea attached to Considera- 
 tion, 2 the improper Idea attached to gain (labha-), to one's own 
 affairs (sakkara-), and reputation (siloka-), the improper Idea 
 attached to lack of compassion for another. 3 These verily, O 
 monks, are the three improper Ideas/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' He that is attached to consideration, 
 To gain, to one's own affairs, and esteem, 
 That taketh pleasure in companionship 
 He is far from the destruction of the Fetters. 
 
 But (lit. and) he that hath abandoned children and herds, 
 
 Dwelling apart and abandoning society 4 
 
 Such a monk as this is able 
 
 To attain Supreme Enlightenment/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 1 For the apocopated form, cf. the preceding resume, page 79, note 2. 
 
 *vitakka-; this word is rendered 'Conception' by Mrs. Rhys Davids, DhS. 
 7, 1 60, 167, a rendering which, though suitable to a work of the psycho- 
 logical character of the Dhamma Sanghani, would not be as appropriate here. 
 
 8 anavannatti- ; this unusual word is not in Childers. I should compare it 
 with the Skt. *an-ava-jnapti-. From the Skt. verb jna-, 'to know,' is formed 
 the noun jiiapti-, ' knowledge,' although the verb ava-jna-, ' to despise, to con- 
 temn,' does not have in Sanskrit a corresponding noun *ava-jnapti- ; it is to 
 this hypothetical form with a negative prefix an-, that I compare this Pali 
 word. 
 
 4 anuddayata- ; this seems to be a genuine Pali word. See Samyutta-Nikaya, 
 edited by Leon Peer, vol. 2, p. 218, and also the Vinaya Pitaka, edited by 
 Windisch, vol. 2, p. 196. Compare also Mrs. Rhys Davids, DhS. 1056. 
 Childers, Pali Diet., s. v., correlates the word with Skt. anudaya-, ' pity.' 
 
 6 sangha-, apparently not used here in the usual acceptation of ' the Order.' 
 
- 8 1 ] TRANSLATION 93 
 
 81. * I have seen creatures, O monks, who were overcome, whose 
 thoughts were taken possession of by their own affairs (sakkdra-). 
 who, after the dissolution of the body after death, go to punish- 
 ment, misfortune, torture, and perdition. Those creatures seen 
 by me, O monks, who are overcome, whose thoughts are not 
 taken possession of by their own affairs, after the dissolution 
 of the body after death, go to punishment, misfortune, torture, 
 and perdition. Those creatures seen by me, O monks, who are 
 overcome, whose thoughts neither are nor are not taken pos- 
 session of by their own affairs, after the dissolution of the body 
 after death, go to punishment, misfortune, torture, and perdition. 
 
 ' Now, not having heard this (truth) of (i. e. promulgated by) 
 anyone else, whether devotee or brahman, I say : " Those crea- 
 tures seen by me, O monks, who are overcome, whose thoughts 
 are taken possession of by their own affairs, after the dissolu- 
 tion of the body after death, go to punishment, misfortune, tor- 
 ture, and perdition. Those creatures seen by me, O monks, who 
 are overcome, whose thoughts are not taken possession of by 
 their own affairs, after the dissolution of the body after death, go 
 to punishment, misfortune, torture, and perdition. Those crea- 
 tures seen by me, O monks, who are overcome, whose thoughts 
 neither are nor are not taken possession of by their own affairs, 
 after the dissolution of the body after death, go to punishment, 
 misfortune, torture, and perdition." 
 
 ' And furthermore since this entirety is understood, seen, and 
 known by me, for that reason I say : " Those creatures seen by me 
 O monks, who are overcome, whose thoughts are taken posses- 
 sion of by their own affairs, after the dissolution of the body 
 after death, go to punishment, misfortune, torture, and perdi- 
 tion. Those creatures seen by me, O monks, who are overcome, 
 whose thoughts are not taken possession of by their own affairs, 
 after the dissolution of the body after death, go to punishment, 
 misfortune, torture, and perdition. Those creatures seen by me, 
 O monks, who are overcome, whose thoughts neither are nor are 
 not taken possession of by their own affairs, after the dissolu- 
 
94 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 82 - 
 
 tion of the body after death, go to punishment, misfortune, tor- 
 ture, and perdition." 3 
 
 ' He whose Contemplation (samadhi-) 
 Neither is nor is not disturbed 
 By his own affairs 
 And that liveth attentively 
 
 Him, thoughtful, persevering, (and) discerning the subtle 
 
 (sukhuma-) Belief, 
 Whose delight is in the destruction 
 Of the Clinging to Existence (upadana-) 
 Him they call a good man/ 
 
 82. ' These three divine reports, O monks, go forth time after 
 time 1 among the gods/ ' What three ? ' * At the time, O monks, 
 when a holy disciple hath cut off his hair and beard, and hath 
 donned the yellow robes, (when he) aimeth at the houseless life 
 (of an ascetic) by his renunciation of home at this time, O 
 monks, the divine report goeth forth among the gods : " This holy 
 disciple aimeth at fighting with the devil (Mara)." This, O 
 monks, is the first divine report which goeth forth among the gods 
 time after time. 
 
 'And furthermore, at the time, O monks, when a holy dis- 
 ciple liveth (joined with the junction of Devotion, i. e.) devoted 
 to the seven laws accessory to Supreme Enlightenment at this 
 time, O monks, the divine report goeth forth among the gods: 
 " This holy disciple fighteth with the devil." This O monks, is 
 the second divine report which goeth forth among the gods time 
 after time. 
 
 ' And furthermore, at the time, O monks, when a holy disciple 
 liveth, having by the destruction of the Taints known fact to 
 face and attained in (this) seen world Emancipation of thought 
 and Emancipation of wisdom at this time, O monks, the re- 
 port goeth forth among the gods : " This holy disciple is victor 
 
 1 Edmunds, Buddhist and Christian Gospels, p. 145, translates the phrase 
 samayS samayam upsdaya, as ' from time to time.' The words appear to mean 
 literally ' time including time.' 
 
- 83 ] TRANSLATION 95 
 
 in the conflict, (and) since he hath conquered (at) the battle- 
 front, he dwelleth beyond. 1 This, O monks, is the third divine 
 report which goeth forth among the gods time after time. These 
 verily, O monks, are the three divine reports which go forth 
 among the gods time after time.' 
 
 ' Even the gods verily will do homage unto him 
 Whom they have seen to be victor in the conflict, 
 A disciple of Supreme Enlightenment, 
 Great, time-surpassing. 
 
 " Homage unto thee, O unconquerable one ! 
 Thou who hast overcome the hard to conquer, 
 Who hast constantly overcome 
 The army of Death by Release (vlmokkha-) " 
 
 Thus will the gods do homage unto him 
 
 That hath attained the goal (manasa-, lit. purpose) ; 
 
 They will do homage unto him 
 
 Because he proceedeth 2 to the power over Death/ 
 
 83. ' O monks, when a god hath fallen from Dharma in his 
 body, there appear five prognostics: garlands wither, garments 
 become soiled, sweat is emitted from the armpits, a bad color 
 cometh upon his body, the god taketh no pleasure in his divine 
 ambrosia. 
 
 ' The (other) gods, O monks, when they have learned that this 
 son of a god hath fallen from Dharma, sympathize with him in 
 three phrases, namely, "Go hence, sir, unto felicity (sugati-), 
 and when thou hast gone thither, do thou take that which is 
 good to take (suladdha-labham labha), and when thou hast so 
 done, do thou be firmly established therein." ' 3 
 
 When this was said a certain monk spake unto the Blessed 
 One in this manner: * What in sooth, Sire, is considered an 
 attainment of felicity on the part of the gods, and what, Sire, a 
 
 1 ajjhSvasati, Skt. *adhy-a-vas- ; this would seem to imply 'he dwelleth in 
 Nirvana.' 
 
 * vajati, Skt. root vraj-. 
 
 8 suppatitthita-, Skt. su-prati-stha-. 
 
96 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 83- 
 
 taking of what is good to take on the part of the gods, and 
 further, Sire, what is considered " being firmly established there- 
 in " on the part of the gods? ' ' Humanity (manussatta-) verily, 
 O monks, is considered an attainment of felicity on the part of the 
 gods. The Faith which a devotee, when he hath become human, 
 doth acquire from the discipline of the law made known by the 
 Consummate One this (Faith) verily, O monks, is considered 
 on the part of the gods a taking of what is good to take. Fur- 
 thermore this Faith becometh fixed in him (lit. of him) firmly 
 established (because) born from the depths of his being, firm, 
 not to be restricted by devotee, or brahman, or god, or devil, or by 
 brahman or anyone else in the world ; this verily, O monks, is con- 
 sidered on the part of the gods " being firmly established 
 therein." ' 
 
 ' When, owing to the uncertainty of life, 
 A god falleth from his divine body 
 Three reports go forth among the gods 
 In sympathy with him: 
 
 " Go hence, sir, unto felicity, 
 Unto companionship 1 of men, 
 And, when thou hast become human, 
 (Go unto) the unsurpassed Faith. 
 
 " This is the Faith of thee (who art) fixed therein 2 
 A Faith that is born from the depths (of thy being), 
 Not to be shaken 3 as long as life doth last ; 
 It is made known 4 in the True Law. 
 
 * sahavyatam ; I take this as the ace. sing, of a nom. sahavyata, and 
 compare it with Skt. *saha-vya-ta-. In Sanskrit the suffix -vya is not common 
 as a secondary suffix (see Whitney, Skt. Gram., 1228 c), and seems to be 
 used exclusively with words expressing relationship, e. g., pitruya-, ' paternal 
 uncle.' The suffix -vya is exemplified in Pali in other words, e. g., dasavyam-, 
 ' servitude, slavery,' and patavyata-, Skt. patavyata-, ' injury, slaying.' 
 
 nivittha-, Skt. ni-vrtta-, from the root vrt-, ' to turn.' 
 
 3 asamhira; I take this word as a formation from sam-irati, comparing it 
 with the Skt. lr-, ' to set in motion, to shake.' For the insertion of the letter 
 h see Pischel, Gramtnatik der Prakrit-Sprachen, 338. It must be noted, 
 however, that samirati without the h does not occur in Pali. Franke, Pali 
 und Sanskrit, p. 101, n. 63, says: 'Vortritt von h nicht uberall belegt.' 
 
 * suppav edite ; compare Skt. causative of su-pra-vid-. 
 
- 84 ] TRANSLATION gj 
 
 " For, having avoided 
 Evil actions of body, 
 Word, and thought, 
 That hath evil repute, 1 
 
 " And having done much and boundless good 
 In body, word, and thought, 
 One doth become 
 Freed from the Substrata. 
 
 " For by giving he hath acquired this great virtue 
 Which is related to the Substrata ; 
 Verily he hath stablished other mortals 
 According to the True Law of Chastity." 
 
 When the gods know that a god hath fallen, 
 With this kindly feeling 2 
 They do encourage him 
 " Be thou a god again and again." ' 
 
 84. ' There are these three individuals, O monks, 8 who are 
 born into the world for the advantage and for the felicity of many 
 persons, out of kindly feeling for the world, for the benefit, for 
 the advantage and for the felicity of gods and men/ ' What 
 three ? ' ' Here in the world, O monks, is born the Sanctified One, 
 the Supremely Enlightened One, who is endowed with knowledge 
 and (good) behavior, who is felicitous, who knoweth the world, 
 an unsurpassed guider of men that have to be tamed, a teacher 
 of gods and men, enlightened, blessed. He it is that expoundeth 
 the law of the beginning, middle, and end of good acts, and who 
 maketh known the Teacher with his characteristics, (and who 
 maketh known) the full and perfect life of Chastity. This, O 
 
 1 dosa-sannita-, Skt. dosa-sam = jna-. 
 
 *imaya kampaya; in form this may be either an instr., dat., abl., or gen. 
 It is probably an instr. of quality, equivalent to the Latin abl. of quality. See 
 Speyer, Sanskrit Syntax, p. 50, para. 3. 
 
 * The vocative occurs only in S. 
 
 8 
 
98 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 84 - 
 
 monks, is the first individual that is born into the world for the 
 advantage and for the felicity of many persons, out of kindly feel- 
 ing for the world, for the benefit, for the advantage, and for the 
 felicity of gods and men. 
 
 ' And moreover, after him, O monks, there is (an individual) 
 who is called a disciple of the Teacher, sanctified, with Taints 
 destroyed, who doeth his duty, who hath laid aside his burden, 
 who hath attained the right goal (attha-), with Bonds of Exist- 
 ence completely destroyed, emancipated by perfect knowledge. 
 He it is that expoundeth the law of the beginning, middle, and end 
 of good acts, and who maketh known the Teacher with his 
 characteristics, (and who maketh known) the full and perfect life 
 of Chastity. This verily, O monks, is the second individual that 
 is born into the world for the advantage and for the felicity of 
 many persons, out of kindly feeling for the world, for the benefit, 
 for the advantage, and for the felicity of gods and men. 
 
 ' And moreover, after him, O monks, there is (an individual) 
 who is called a disciple of the Teacher, a novitiate imbued with 
 intelligence, 1 learned, endowed with that which maketh for 
 Character (sllavat-). He it is that expoundeth the law of the 
 beginning, middle, and end of good acts, and who maketh known 
 the Teacher with his characteristics, (and who maketh known) 
 the full and perfect life of Chastity. This, O monks, is the third 
 individual that is born into the world for the advantage and for 
 the felicity of many persons, out of kindly feeling for the world, 
 for the benefit, for the advantage, and for the felicity of gods and 
 men. These verily, O monks, are the three individuals who are 
 born into the world for the advantage and for the felicity of 
 gods and men.' 
 
 ' The Teacher verily is the first great Sage in the world ; 
 Following him is the disciple of perfected mind, 
 And then next the novitiate, imbued with intelligence, 
 Learned, endowed with that which maketh for Character. 
 
 1 patipada-, a vrddhi derivative of Skt. prati-pad-. 
 
85] TRANSLATION 99 
 
 These three, teachers of gods and men, 
 Givers of radiance, speaking forth the Law, 
 Unclose the door of immortality 1 ; 
 They release many from the Bond. 
 
 Those who, by the unsurpassed leadership of the Teacher, 
 
 Follow on the path which hath well been shown, 
 
 And those who are earnest in the teachings of the Felicitous 
 
 One, 
 Make an end of Misery e'en here (in the world)/ 
 
 85. ' Ye should live, O monks, seeing what is impurity in 
 the body; there should likewise be present before you internally 
 attention (lit. memory) to your inhalation and exhalation 
 (dnapdna-) ; ye should live seeing impermanence in the Aggre- 
 gates. 
 
 'And of those that live seeing what is impurity in the body, 
 whatever inclination (anusaya-) toward Passion there is (in 
 them), (all that inclination) is destroyed by their elements of 
 purity (lit. by their pure element). 
 
 ' And (likewise) from having present before oneself internally 
 attention to (one's) inhalation and exhalation, whatever external 
 repositories of ideas (i. e. modes of thought) there are, which 
 tend toward hindrance, they become of no account (lit. do not 
 exist). 
 
 ' And of those that live seeing the impermanence which is in 
 the Aggregates whatever ignorance there is in those people, 
 (all that ignorance) is destroyed, and whatsoever sapience (vijja-) 
 there is in those people, (all that sapience) cometh to the fore.' 2 
 
 ' The one that seeth what is impure in the body, 
 With his thoughts fixed on inhalation and exhalation, 
 Seeing the tranquillity (samatha-) of all the Aggregates, 
 Ardent at all times, 
 
 1 This phrase is in absolute contradiction with the usual Buddhist doctrine, 
 which states distinctly that immortality is not and should not be the goal of 
 the righteous man. 
 
 2 itppajjati, lit. ' rises up, comes into being.' 
 
IOO ITI-VUTTAKA [86- 
 
 This monk verily hath proper vision 
 
 Inasmuch as he is emancipated here (in this world) ; 
 
 If he is good and hath attained Insight, - 
 
 He is a sage that hath escaped the yoke of earthly existence.' 
 
 86. ' This is a lesser law unto a monk that hath entered upon 
 his greater and his lesser laws. In explanation 1 of the phrase 
 " that hath entered upon his greater and his lesser laws " : he 
 is one that speaketh that which is lawful, he is one that speaketh 
 not that which is unlawful ; he is one that reflecteth on that which 
 is lawful, he is one that reflecteth not on that which is not lawful. 
 When he hath accomplished 2 both of these things, he liveth re- 
 signed, 3 thoughtful, and mindful/ 
 
 ' The monk that delighteth in and is delighted by the Law, 
 That doth meditate upon the Law, 
 That remembereth the Law, 
 Doth not abandon the True Law. 
 
 If in going or in standing, 
 
 Or in sitting or in reclining, 
 
 He gaineth supremacy over* his own thoughts, 
 
 Truly that one goeth to Repose/ 
 
 87. ' There are these three improper ideas, O monks, which 
 cause blindness, lack of sight, and ignorance, bring about cessa- 
 tion of wisdom, tend toward hindrance, and conduce to absence 
 of Nirvana/ 'What three?' 'The idea of Lust, O monks, 
 
 1 veyyakaranftya, cf. Skt. vyakarana-, ' Auseinandersetzung.' I am indebted 
 to the kindness of Dr. Truman Michelson for the explanation of this form 
 as a dative of purpose. See Kuhn, Pali Grammatik, 70. The word is not 
 cited in Childers with this meaning. 
 
 *abhinivajjetva; this may be analyzed as a gerund of abhi-ni-varjayati, 
 from the root vrj-. The compound does not appear in Sanskrit. Consult 
 Bohtlingk and Roth under abhivarga-, defined as ' Bereich.' 
 
 8 The foregoing prose passage very strongly confirms, it seems to me, the 
 view advanced in the Introduction, p. 9-10, namely, that the prose portions of 
 the Iti-vuttaka are in the nature of a commentary. This particular one does 
 not seem to have a very close connection with the following stanzas. 
 
 *samayam; I take this as a pres. participle of the root fam-. 
 
-88] TRANSLATION IOI 
 
 causeth blindness, lack of sight, and ignorance, bringeth about 
 cessation of wisdom, tendeth toward hindrance, and conduceth 
 to absence of Nirvana. The idea of Malevolence, O monks, 
 causeth blindness, lack of sight, and ignorance, bringeth about 
 cessation of wisdom, tendeth toward hindrance, and conduceth 
 to absence of Nirvana. The idea of Cruelty, O monks, causeth 
 blindness, lack of sight, and ignorance, bringeth about cessation 
 of wisdom, tendeth toward hindrance, and conduceth to absence 
 of Nirvana. 1 
 
 ' There are these three proper ideas, O monks, which do not 
 cause blindness, lack of sight, and ignorance, which do not bring 
 about cessation of wisdom, which tend not toward hindrance, 
 (but) which conduce to Nirvana/ 'What three? 1 'The idea 
 of Separation (nekkhamma-) , O monks, causeth not blindness, 
 lack of sight, and ignorance, doth not bring about cessation of 
 wisdom, doth not tend toward hindrance, (but) conduceth to 
 Nirvana. The idea of Non-malevolence, O monks, causeth not 
 blindness, lack of sight, and ignorance, doth not bring about 
 cessation of wisdom, doth not tend toward hindrance, (but) con- 
 duceth to Nirvana. The idea of Non-cruelty, O monks, causeth 
 not blindness, lack of sight, and ignorance, doth not bring about 
 cessation of wisdom, doth not tend toward hindrance, (but) con- 
 duceth to Nirvana/ 
 
 'One should reflect on the three proper ideas, and should 
 
 renounce 
 
 The three improper ones. He verily that doth reflect upon 
 And doth subdue 2 his ideas, as the rain doth subdue 
 Dust that is raised he truly e'en here (in this world) 
 By gaining supremacy over his ideas by his thought (or, 
 
 heart), 
 Hath gone unto a condition of Repose/ 
 
 88. ' There are, O monks, these three internal impurities, 
 internal foes, internal enemies, internal murderers, and internal 
 
 1 Compare the similar passage in no. 
 8 Literally ' subdues his reflected-on ideas.' 
 
I O2 ITI-VUTTAK A [ 88 - 
 
 adversaries/ ' What three ? ' ' Desire, O monks, is an internal 
 impurity, foe, enemy, murderer, and adversary. Hate, O monks, 
 is an internal impurity, foe, enemy, murderer, and adversary. 
 Delusion, O monks, is an internal impurity, foe, enemy, murderer, 
 and adversary. These verily, O monks, are the three internal 
 impurities, foes, enemies, murderers, and adversaries/ 
 
 1 Desire begetteth unseemliness (anattha-) ; 
 Desire exciteth the thoughts; 
 A person is not aware of this danger 
 Which is born from within. 
 
 The man that is dominated by Desire 
 
 Doth not know what is seemly and seeth not the Law; 
 
 That man whom Desire doth accompany, 
 
 Becometh like unto murky (andha-) darkness. 
 
 And he that hath abandoned Desire, 
 
 And desireth not the things that make for Desire 
 
 From him Desire doth pass away 
 
 As doth a drop of water from the lotus. 
 
 Hate begetteth unseemliness; 
 Hate exciteth the thoughts; 
 A person is not aware of this danger 
 Which is born from within. 
 
 The man that is dominated by Anger 
 Doth not know what is seemly and seeth not the Law ; 
 That man whom Hate doth accompany, 
 Becometh like unto murky darkness. 
 
 And he that hath abandoned Hate, 
 
 And hateth not the things that make for Hate 
 
 From him Hate doth pass away 
 
 As doth Tal 1 fruit from its stem. 
 
 1 From this word comes the English term ' toddy ' ; see Hobson-Jobson, s. v. 
 With this Pali word compare the Hindustani tari, ' the fermented sap of the 
 palmyra.' 
 
89 ] TRANSLATION 1 03 
 
 Delusion begetteth unseemliness ; 
 Delusion exciteth the thoughts ; 
 A person is not aware of this danger 
 Which is born from within. 
 
 The man that is under Delusion 
 
 Doth not know what is seemly and seeth not the Law; 
 That man whom Delusion doth accompany 
 Becometh like unto murky darkness. 
 
 And he that hath abandoned Delusion, and is not deluded 
 
 By the things which make for Delusion 
 
 He doth dispel all Delusion, 
 
 As the rising sun (dispelleth) the darkness.' 
 
 89. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' By three 1 errors, O monks, was Devadatta overcome and over- 
 powered in spirit (lit. 'thought'), and was (caused to) stay for 
 an aeon of time in punishment and perdition without relief/ 2 
 ' By what three ? ' 'By sinful longing, O monks, was Devadatta 
 overcome and overpowered in spirit, and caused to stay for an 
 aeon of time in punishment and perdition without relief. By 
 sinful association, O monks, was Devadatta overcome and over- 
 powered in spirit, and caused to stay for an aeon of time in 
 punishment and perdition. But when, in truth, he became mind- 
 ful of his higher duties, 3 he did enter, by means of his mundane 
 conduct* and his attainment of discrimination, upon 5 the (fitting) 
 end. By these three errors verily, O monks, was Devadatta 
 overcome and overpowered in spirit, and caused to stay for an 
 aeon of time in punishment and perdition.' 
 
 1 There seems to be something missing from the text, as only two ' errors ' 
 are mentioned in this prose passage, as far as I understand it. 
 
 *atekiccha-, from the verb tikicchati, Skt. cikitsati, 'to treat medically, to 
 cure.' 
 
 * A locative absolute. 
 
 * oramattaka-, not clear to me (possibly compare Skt. avara- and worfo-?). 
 8 antara dpadi, literally ' entered within.' 
 
IO4 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 89 - 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said 
 the following: 
 
 ' Let no one be born in any world soever 
 Having sinful longings; 
 Know ye this also by this 1 (my message) 
 (Namely) how is the road of them that have evil longings. 
 
 I have heard that Devadatta, 
 
 Who was termed " wise," 
 
 And who was considered to be " of perfected mind," 
 
 Was resplendent in glory. 
 
 But having acted carelessly 2 
 And offended 3 the Consummate One, 
 He reached the Waveless perdition 4 
 Four-portaled and frightful. 
 
 For whosoever harmeth 5 an inoffensive 6 man 
 
 That hath done no deed of evil, 
 
 Upon him indeed (*'. e. the offender), being offensive in 
 
 thought 
 And lacking in respect, evil will light. 7 
 
 Whoso should think to pollute 
 The ocean by a jar of poison, 
 He could not pollute it by that, 
 For the sea is great (er) than the jar. 
 
 1 tadamina is the reading of all the texts, except B, which reads tadamina, 
 and S, which has tadimina. I follow the latter reading, and analyze the word 
 into tad-, ' this/ and iminS-, an instrumental case of one of the stems of the 
 demonstrative pronoun ayam. See Whitney, Skt. Gram., 501. 
 
 8 Literally ' having walked after carelessness.' 
 
 *apajja; I take this to be a gerund of a-pad-. See Apte, Skt. Diet., under 
 the third meaning, ' to get into misfortune, fall into trouble/ 
 
 4 One of the eight narakas, or hells, regarded as the most dreadful. 
 
 5 dubbhe, an opt. 3rd sing., Skt. druhyet. See Kuhn, Pali Grammatik, p. 42. 
 * aduttha-, probably analogous to Skt. a-duh-stha-. 
 
 f It seems to me that the causative phusseti, Skt. sprf-, is out of place here, 
 and I should therefore follow B in reading phussati. 
 
-QO] TRANSLATION 1 05 
 
 Even so he that (thinketh to) injure by a word 
 
 The Consummate One; 
 
 A word doth not reach unto Him, 
 
 Walking uprightly, good in thought. 
 
 A wise man should make such a one his friend, 
 
 And should follow him, 
 
 In following whose path, 
 
 A monk may attain destruction of Misery/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 [End of the] Fourth Chapter [i. e. of the third division] 
 
 Resume p 
 
 Idea (8o) 1 ; his own affairs (8i) 1 ; report (82) 1 ; 
 Falling (83) 2 ; in the world (84) ; offensive (85) ; 
 Law ( 86) 3 ; causing blindness, (87)*; impurity (88); 
 By Devadatta (89) 5 ; these ten. 
 
 90. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' There are, O monks, these three kinds of Serenity 6 in the High- 
 est.' ' What three ? ' 'As many creatures as there are, O monks, 
 whether without feet, or with two feet, or with four feet, or with 
 many feet, or having form, or without form, sentient or non- 
 sentient, or neither sentient nor non-sentient highest above them 
 all is accounted the Consummate One, the Sanctified One, the 
 
 1 Note the stem forms, vitakka-, sakkdra-, sadda-, instead of the nom. case. 
 
 2 Note the participle cavamana- instead of the noun cavana-. 
 
 * We should expect anudhammo, ' Lesser Law,' as is in the text. 
 
 4 In the text of this section the important word is akusala-vitakka-, 'im- 
 proper ideas,' and is modified by a list of adjectives. The writer of this 
 resume has simply chosen the first one of this list in place of the important 
 noun which it modifies 
 
 Note the use of the instrumental case for the sake of the meter. 
 
 * agga-pasada-, Skt. agra-prasada- ; the second element in Skt. means 
 ' condescension, propitiousness, serenity, calmness.' The word agga- is found 
 no less than eleven times in the stanzas below. 
 
ITI-VUTTAKA [QO- 
 
 Perfectly Enlightened One. Whatsoever ( persons ),O monks, have 
 found Serenity in the Highest, they have found Serenity in that 
 which is Highest, and unto them, moreover, that have found 
 Serenity in the Highest, there cometh highest fruition. 
 
 As many laws as there are, O monks, whether compounded or 
 not compounded, the highest of them is accounted absence of 
 passion, that is to say, the effacing of lasciviousness, the repres- 
 sion of thirst (pipasa-), giving up one's abode, refraining from 
 conversation 1 , destruction of Thirst (tanha-) ; (for) absence of 
 passion (is) Cessation, Nirvana. 
 
 * Whatsoever (persons), O monks, have found Serenity in the 
 law of the absence of passion, they have found Serenity in that 
 which is Highest, and unto them, moreover, that have found 
 Serenity in the Highest, there cometh highest fruition. 
 
 ' Whatsoever perfected laws there are, O monks, the noble 
 eightfold Path is proclaimed to be the soul (atman-) of them. 
 For example: Right Belief, right resolves, right words, right 
 occupations (kammanta-), right ways of living, right exertion, 
 right reflection, right Contemplation (samadhi-). 
 
 'Whatsoever (persons), O monks, have found Serenity in the 
 law of the Noble Faith, they have found Serenity in that which 
 is Highest, and to them that have found Serenity in the Highest, 
 there cometh highest fruition. 2 
 
 ' Whatsoever Orders or Congregations there are, O monks, 
 the highest of these is accounted the Order of the disciples of 
 the Consummate One, namely, four couples of men, eight indi- 
 viduals 3 , this is the Order of the disciples of the Blessed One, 
 (this Order) worthy of worship, worthy of hospitable treatment, 
 worthy of offerings, worthy of salutation, the unsurpassed realm 
 (lit. field) of virtue in the world. 4 
 
 ' Whatsoever persons, O monks, have found Serenity in the 
 
 1 vattum, infin. of vatti, Skt. vac-. 
 
 8 The two preceding paragraphs are found only in S. 
 
 8 One is tempted to take this small number of members in the Congrega- 
 tion, or Order, as an indication of the beginnings of the Buddhist monaster- 
 ies, and as perhaps implying an early date of compilation of this work. 
 
 * The preceding paragraph is not in S. 
 
-9l] TRANSLATION IO/ 
 
 Order, they have found Serenity in that which is Highest, and to 
 them that have found Serenity in the Highest, there cometh high- 
 est fruition/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Of them that have found Serenity in that which is highest, 
 Comprehending the Highest Law, 
 Having found Serenity in the Highest Buddha, 
 Worthy of offerings (and) unsurpassed 
 
 Of them that have found Serenity in the Highest Law 
 Which stilleth Lusts and is happy (i. e. giveth happiness) 
 Having found Serenity in the Highest Order, 
 The unsurpassed realm of virtue 
 
 Of those giving gifts of the first fruits 
 (Of all these) the highest virtue increaseth, 
 And likewise the highest life and repute, 1 
 Fame, renown, happiness, (and) power. 
 
 The wise one that is a giver of that which is highest, 
 
 Who is intent on the Highest Law, 
 
 Whether he be god or mortal, 
 
 He doth rejoice in his attainment of the Highest Goal/ 
 
 91. ' This, O monks, is the lowest of vocations, namely, the 
 (vocation of ) a Pindola ; this word, 2 O monks, refers to the fact 
 that Pindola wandered about in the world with bowl in hand. 
 And there come unto 3 this very man, O monks, the sons of 
 (noble) family, (sons who) are possessed of* wealth, for 
 
 1 vanna-, Skt. v arna-, primarily ' color, beauty,' then * caste/ It can hardly 
 have the latter meaning here, as the Buddhistic tendency was away from caste. 
 
 * abhilapa-, lit. 'the designation (is derived from) the fact that (tV*)/ 
 
 9 vasika- ; this word can mean either ' under the control, or possession, of ' 
 and ' empty, devoid of.' 
 
 4 From this point throughout the remainder of this section, I confess 
 extreme uncertainty in my interpretation. The only facts of which I feel 
 fairly sure are that Pindola at first had a good reputation and attracted noble 
 
IO8 ITI-VUTTAKA [ QI - 
 
 the sake of 1 the possession of wealth; not only those that 
 are brought before kings are 2 made religious mendicants, nor 
 those brought before robbers, nor yet those in debt, nor those in 
 fear(?). And furthermore (there come) 3 those who are o'er- 
 spread with Misery, who are overcome with Misery, on account 
 of birth, old age, death, griefs, lamentations, miseries, woes, and 
 distresses, with the idea (iti) that possibly (dpi eva nama) a 
 termination of all this Aggregate of Misery may be learned from 
 him that hath crossed beyond (birth, old age, etc.). 
 
 ' And even so, O monks, this son of noble family (meaning 
 Pindola ?) becometh* covetous, with keen passion for Lusts, 
 malevolent in thought, corrupt in his mind's aims, of forgetful 
 memory, unmindful, not self -composed, with wandering thoughts, 
 with untamed senses. 
 
 'Just as 5 a funeral torch, O monks, standing in a dung heap, 
 giving light between both (*. e. the village and the forest ?), 
 neither kindleth the store of faggots in the village, nor in the 
 forest; by such a simile do I speak of this individual, (for) he 
 hath, on the one hand, abstained from the enjoyments of the house- 
 holder, and yet, on the other hand, he maketh not full the wealth 
 of the order of devotees ( ?) .' 
 
 * Having, on the one hand, abstained from the pleasures of the 
 
 householder, 
 Yet, on the other, (being) ill-fortuned, with ruined self-respect 
 
 (mana-, lit. pride), 
 
 He doth scatter forth the wealth of the order of the devotees ; 
 He perisheth like a funeral torch. 
 
 followers, but later fell from grace, and after his fall is compared to the 
 futile dying flame of a funeral torch. Are we to compare with this the story 
 of Pindola-Bharadvaja and the sandal bowl? See Kern, Manual of Indian 
 Buddhism (Strassburg, 1896), pp. 32, 108. 
 
 I paticca, Skt. pratltya, lit. ' going up to, for the purpose of/ 
 
 I 1 follow S in omitting na before ajtvikS pakatS. 
 8 Supplying upenti from the preceding sentence. 
 
 4 Omit so ca, following B, C, M, P, Pa, S. 
 e On seyyathS compare page 126, note 2. 
 
- 9 2 ] TRANSLATION 
 
 Better would it be to swallow a heated iron ball, 
 Like flaming fire, than that a bad, 
 Unrestrained fellow should live 
 On the charity of the land/ 
 
 92. ' Even if a monk should gather up the edges of his robe 
 and follow behind me, 1 and should walk in my footsteps (lit. 
 step by step), yet if he should become covetous, 2 with keen 
 passion for Lusts, malevolent in thought, corrupt in the aspira- 
 tion of his mind, of heedless memory, 3 unmindful, not self- 
 composed, letting his thoughts wander, with his senses unculti- 
 vated, 4 then is he far from me and I from him/ 'Why?' 
 ' Because, O monks, that monk seeth not the Law, and seeing 
 not the Law he seeth not me. 
 
 ' But if a monk should dwell even a hundred leagues from me 5 
 and be not covetous, nor with keen passion for Lusts, nor malevo- 
 lent in thought, nor corrupt in his mind's aspiration, (but) heed- 
 ful in memory, mindful, self -composed, noble in thought, with 
 his senses cultivated, then is he near to me and I to him/ 
 ' Why ? ' ' Because, O monks, that monk seeth the Law, and 
 seeing the Law, he seeth me/ 
 
 1 pitthito anubandho ; the former word is analogous to Skt. prsthatas, ' from 
 the rear, behind.' The latter word anubandha- is, in my opinion, a wrong 
 reading ; it is glossed in Bohtlingk and Roth as ' Band, Verbindung, ununter- 
 brochene Reihe oder Folge ; Absicht.' The compound verb anu-bandhati, how- 
 ever, means * to follow.' I should therefore change the reading in the Pali 
 to anubaddho, a past participle of this verb. Edmunds, who has translated 
 the prose portion of this section, Buddhist and Christian Gospels, p. 149, has 
 the same translation as above. 
 
 3 abhijjhalu, Skt. abhi-dhya-, 'longing, wish, desire,' plus the suffix -alii, 
 for which compare Whitney, Skt. Gram., 1192 b and 1227!). 
 
 8 muttha-sati- ; for an explanation of the first member of this compound I 
 am indebted to my friend Mr. Chas. J. Ogden, who suggested that this word is 
 to be compared to the Skt. root mrs-. The past participle of this root does not 
 actually occur in any Sanskrit text, but this Pali muttha- corresponds perfectly 
 to this hypothetical form in Sanskrit. Compare Pischel, Grammatik der 
 Prakrit-Sprachen, 51. 
 
 *pakata-; this word corresponds to Skt. prakrta-, from which comes the 
 designation ' Prakrit ' for the vulgar dialects. 
 
 1 follow the variant me instead of so, as it seems the better reading. 
 
IIO ITI-VUTTAKA [9 2 ~ 
 
 ' If even a follower should become cupidinous and destructive, 
 See how far is the one that goeth after temptation, 1 
 
 From him that goeth not after it; 
 
 How far is the one that is not content, 
 
 From him that is content; 
 
 How far the greedy one is from him that is devoid of greed. 
 
 And he that hath insight into the Law, 
 
 And is wise through his knowledge of the Law, 
 
 He, like a pool sheltered from the wind, 2 
 
 Or like one without temptation, is absorbed in Repose. 3 
 
 See how near he that is without temptation 
 
 Is to him that is without temptation ; 
 
 How near he that is tranquil is to him that is tranquil ; 
 
 How near he that is unselfish is to him that is unselfish/ 
 
 93. ' There are these three Fires, O monks/ ' What three? ' 
 1 The Fire of Passion, the Fire of Hate, the Fire of Delusion. 
 These verily, O monks, are the three fires/ 
 
 ' The fire of Passion burneth mortals 
 Addicted to Lusts (and) stupefied; 
 The fire of Hate, moreover, burneth 
 The malevolent men, who kill living beings. 
 
 The fire of Delusion burneth the infatuated, 
 Those unskilled in the Noble Law ; 
 These fires (consume) ignorant mankind 
 That take delight in their own bodies. 
 
 -; I analyze as eja-anuga-. The former word Mrs. Rhys Davids, 
 DhS. 1059, translates as 'seduction.' In the commentary of Buddhaghosa 
 to the Dhammapada it is glossed by akaddhana-, ' drawing, attraction.' 
 
 2 1 follow S. reading vilpasammati. Compare Childers, Pali Diet., under 
 vupasamana-. 
 
 8 1 follow P, reading rahado upanivato va, which to me is the only intel- 
 ligible reading. The extra syllable may be accounted for either by assuming 
 that the anaptyctic vowel of rahado does not count in the meter, or by assuming 
 synizesis with the following word. 
 
- 94] TRANSLATION III 
 
 They (*. e. the ignorant) swell (the realm of) perdition, 
 And the wombs of animals, 
 
 And the realm of the gods and the departed spirits (pretas), 
 Since they are not freed from the bonds of Mara. 
 
 And they that are devoted night and day 
 
 To the commandments of the Supremely Enlightened One 
 
 Such people distinguish the fire of Passion 
 
 By being constantly aware of impurity. 
 
 Superior men, moreover, extinguish 
 
 The fire of Hate by friendship, 
 
 And the fire of Delusion by wisdom, 
 
 That wisdom which causeth one to attain Discrimination. 
 
 Those prudent (nipaka-) people having unweariedly 
 Night and day extinguished (these fires), 
 Attain Nirvana absolutely, 
 And absolutely transcend Misery. 
 
 They, of noble vision, versed in the Veda, 
 
 Wise through right knowledge, 
 
 (And) having insight into the destruction of Birth, 
 
 Do not attain Re-existence.' 
 
 94. * A monk should so investigate, O monks, that when he 
 hath 1 investigated externally (bahiddha), his Intellection 2 becom- 
 eth clear ; since he doth not fear the future, through his not being 
 attached to (what is) undiffused, internal, (and) non-static, he 
 becometh possessed of no cause for the origin of the misery of 
 Birth, Old Age, and Death.' 
 
 * A monk that hath abandoned the company of creatures, 
 That hath cut (loose from) the current, 3 
 
 He hath utterly destroyed the Transmigration of Births; 
 He hath no Re-existence/ 
 
 1 The ca here is difficult to explain. 
 
 2 vinnana- ; see page 88, note 6, with ref . there given. 
 
 * Compare the compound ahara-netti-, ' current of subsistence,' in 43. 
 
1 1 2 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 95 - 
 
 95. 'There are, O monks, these three sources 1 of Lust/ 
 ' What three ? ' ' (The sources are in) people that have Lust 
 for present things; (in people) that delight in created Lusts; 
 (in people) that are subject to Lusts created by others. These 
 verily, O monks, are the three sources of Lust/ 2 
 
 ' Those gods with Lust for present things, 
 Being subject to them . . . 
 And those other gods who feast on Lust, 
 Delighting in created pleasures . . . 8 
 
 Under these and other circumstances 
 A wise man should give up 
 All Lust for sensual enjoyments 
 Both divine and human. 
 
 Cutting off the torrent hard to cross, 
 Which is connected with* what is pleasant and joyful, 
 They attain Nirvana absolutely; 
 They absolutely transcend Misery. 
 
 1 upapatti- > no Sanskrit cognate. It may be a formation from the com- 
 pound *upa-pad-. Childers, Pali Diet., s. v., defines as ' sensual existence ' and 
 cites three kinds of katna-upapattis ; they are (i) mankind and the four lowest 
 deva-lokas, ' god-worlds', (2) nimmana-rati, ' created delight,' (3) paranim- 
 mita-rati, 'subjection to (Lusts) created by others.' I do not feel at all cer- 
 tain about the word. 
 
 The brevity of this, as well as of the two preceding prose passages, is 
 noteworthy. The prose in this particular passage is inadequate, it seems to 
 me, for the purpose of an introduction and a commentary upon the stanzas 
 which follow. It contains no reference to the last three stanzas, and, as I 
 think, the explanation of the first stanza is not adequate. 
 
 In my opinion something has been lost after the first stanza. The two 
 ye's ought to have two corresponding te's. It must be said, however, that 
 vasavattino and nimmanaratino might each be taken as a predicate in an 
 eliptical clause, thus : ' What gods are with Lust for present things, (they are) 
 subject to them ; and what other gods are feasting on Lust, (they are) delight- 
 ing in created things.' But the pronoun ya- usually has a correlative expressed, 
 and for this reason I assume a break in the text after verse 4. As strengthen- 
 ing this view, it may be noted that there does not seem to be any grammatical 
 connection between the first and second stanzas. Further evidence of textual 
 corruption within this section lies in the fact that lines k-p are found word 
 for word in 93 preceding. 
 
 4 gadh-; see page 48, note 3. 
 
- 97 ] TRANSLATION 1 1 3 
 
 They, of noble vision, versed in the Veda, 
 Wise through right knowledge, 
 (And) having insight into the destruction of Birth, 
 Do not attain Re-existence/ 
 
 96. ' He that is joined to the yoke of Lust, O monks, that is 
 joined to the yoke of Existence, turning back, returneth to this 
 world. He that is loosed from the yoke of Lust, O monks, (but) 
 is joined to the yoke of Existence, doth not turn back or return 
 to this world. He that is loosed from the yoke of Lust, O monks, 
 and is loosed from the yoke of Existence, becometh a Sanctified 
 One and hath his Taints destroyed/ 
 
 ' Those creatures that are joined 
 Both to the yoke of Lust 
 
 And the yoke of Existence, go to Transmigration, 
 And to Birth and Death. 
 
 And those that have abandoned Lusts, 
 But have not attained destruction of the Taints, 
 (Even though still) joined to the yoke of Existence 
 They are called " Non-returners." 
 
 And those that have ceased from Transmigration, 1 
 Destroying Re-birth, and who have attained 
 Destruction of the Taints* they verily have in this world 
 Crossed to the other shore/ 
 
 Third portion for recital 
 
 97. 'A monk who is good in character, O monks, good in the 
 Law, and good in Wisdom, is called " perfected in the discipline 
 of the Law," he is (also) called a " Supreme Man." And how, 
 O monks, doth a monk become good in Character? A monk be- 
 cometh good in character here (in this world), O monks, (if) 
 he liveth restrained by the restraint of the Precepts, 2 endowed 
 
 *I follow P, which reads khina-samsSlra, as -samsayS, 'doubts,' does not 
 seem so appropriate to the context. 
 
 1 patimokkha- ; this is the name of an epitome, or brief list of rules, which 
 precede's the Vinaya Pitaka, the second of the three ' baskets ' of the Buddhistic 
 eanon. For a good discussion, see Pavolini, Buddhismo (Milan, 1898), p. 79. 
 
 9 
 
1 1 4 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 97 ~ 
 
 with a (wide) range of good behavior, 1 if he seeth danger in the 
 smallest faults, and if, having taken them upon himself, he doth 
 exercise himself in the Subjects of Study (sikkapada-). Thus 
 verily, O monks, doth a monk become good in Character. In 
 such manner is one good in character. 
 
 ' And how doth one become good in the Law ? A monk be- 
 cometh good in the Law here (in this world), O monks, (if) he 
 liveth joined by the ties of Devotion to (lit. of) the things ac- 
 cessory to Enlightenment. Thus verily, O monks, doth a monk 
 become good in the Law. In such manner is one good in Char- 
 acter and good in the Law. 
 
 'And how doth one become good in Wisdom? A monk be- 
 cometh good in Wisdom here (in this world), O monks, (if) he 
 liveth having even in the world, by the destruction of his Taints, 
 (gained) insight into the taintless Emancipation of Thought and 
 Wisdom, (and hath) himself known and seen them face to face. 1 
 Thus verily, O monks, a monk doth become good in Wisdom. 
 In such manner, when one hath been called good in Character, 
 good in the Law, good in Wisdom, (and) perfected in the Dis- 
 cipline, he is called a " Supreme Man." 3 
 
 ' He that hath done no evil deed 
 In body, word, or thought 
 Him they call a " modest monk," 
 (For they think :) " He is good in Character." 
 
 He that is well-practised in the Laws, 
 Who goeth to the attainment of Enlightenment 
 Him they call a " faithful (anussada-) monk," 
 (For they think:) " He is good in the Law." 
 
 1 gocara-, lit. ' cow-pasture,' then ' scope, range.' Compare the Skt. com- 
 pound gocara-gata-, * having come within range of,' and locana-gocara-, 
 1 within the range of vision.' 
 
 2 say am abhinnaya sacchikatva upasampajja; for a discussion of this phrase 
 see Childers, Pali Diet., p. 5, second column, at the bottom of the page. 
 
- 99 ] TRANSLATION 115 
 
 He that himself understandeth the destruction 
 
 Of Misery here (in this world) 
 
 Him they call a " taintless monk," 
 
 (For they think:) " He is good in Wisdom." 
 
 He that is endowed with these Laws, 
 
 Who is free from wickedness, and hath cut loose from all 
 
 doubt, 
 
 Who is detached from all the world 
 Him they call " forsaking all the world ! " ' 
 
 98. ' There are, O monks, these two (kinds of) gifts, namely, 
 material (amisa-, lit. fleshly) and spiritual (dhamma-) gifts, 
 and of these two, O monks, the higher is the latter. 
 
 ' There are these two (kinds of) distributions, O monks, 
 namely, material and spiritual distribution (samvibhdga-) , and of 
 these two, O monks, the higher is the latter. 
 
 ' There are these two forms of kindliness (anuggaha-, lit. 
 favor), namely, material and spiritual kindliness, and of these 
 two the higher is the latter/ 
 
 ' Since (men) have called the highest, unsurpassed gift, 
 That which the Blessed One hath described as distribution, 
 (Therefore) no wise, understanding person, whose tranquil 
 thoughts (are fixed) on the Chief Possession (*'. e. Dharma), 
 Would offer sacrifice at (any) time. 
 
 And whatsoever persons both speak and hear (this doctrine), 
 With their tranquil thoughts (fixed) on the Commandment of 
 
 the Auspicious One, 
 And who are zealous in the Commandment of the Auspicious 
 
 One 
 Their highest aim is purified/ 
 
 99. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' By means of the Law, O monks, do I account to be a brah- 
 man him that hath threefold knowledge, and no one else that 
 
1 1 6 ITI- VUTTAK A [ QQ - 
 
 merely talketh talk. 1 And how, O monks, do I account to be 
 a brahman him that hath threefold knowledge, and no one else 
 that merely talketh talk? Here (in this world), O monks, a 
 monk doth recollect his former abode (i. e. his previous existence) 
 variously appointed, thus 2 : " For one, two, three, four, five, ten, 
 twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred- 
 thousand births (jati-), for several Samvat aeons, for several 
 Revolution aeons, for several Samvat and Revolution aeons to- 
 gether, was I (born) there, with such and such a name, family, 
 caste, means of subsistence, experiencing such and such good 
 fortune and misfortune, and (living) such and such a span 
 (pariyanta-) of life. When I departed thence, 3 I was (born) 
 over there (i. e. in some other sphere of existence), with such and 
 such a name, family, caste, means of subsistence, experiencing 
 such and such good fortune and misfortune, and (living) such 
 and such a span of life. When I departed from over there (*. e. 
 the second sphere) I came into existence here." Thus doth he 
 recollect his former abode (i. e. previous existence), variously ap- 
 pointed, with its shapes (akara-) and its regions. This, O 
 monks, is the first knowledge attained by him; ignorance is 
 destroyed and knowledge ariseth ; darkness is destroyed and light 
 
 1 lapita-lapana-mattena ; this word is taken without any change from the 
 first stanza below, line 4. As this stanza is in the ordinary sloka metre, there 
 is one syllable too many in this verse. I suggest that the verse below be 
 emended to read lapita-lapana-mattam, an emendation which not only satisfies 
 metrical requirements, but in addition makes the passage an intelligible one, 
 since the compound can now be construed as modifying the accusative annam, 
 ' some one else,' in verse 3, whereas the compound as it stands is in the 
 instrumental case, and so, I think, impossible of explanation. 
 
 The fact that the writer of the prose portion of this section did not appre- 
 ciate the defective meter, and was not troubled by the curious use of the 
 instrumental case, seems, I think, to strengthen my argument that he often 
 did not wholly and completely understand the verses himself. 
 
 2 On seyyatha compare page 126, note 2. 
 
 8 In spite of all the MSS. I have ventured to omit atnutra udapadim, ' came 
 into being there,' as the two words seem to be pleonastic with the following 
 tatrapasim, ' I was born there ' ; the latter I change into tatrasim, a possible 
 emendation of the variant in C, tairasi, thus paralleling the preceding 
 amutrasim. 
 
- Q9 ] TRANSLATION 1 1 7 
 
 ariseth, since he doth live arcknt and resolute in mind, not dis- 
 regarding Him. 1 
 
 'And furthermore, O monks, by his divine vision (lit. eye), 
 which is pure and transcending what is human, a monk doth see 
 creatures that have fallen and have arisen, that are low and 
 exalted, comely and ill-favored, fortunate and unfortunate, and 
 he doth recognize that creatures follow the destiny of their deeds. 
 And in sooth, sirs, those creatures that are attended by evil actions 
 of body, word and thought, who speak evil of the noble ones, 
 and are heretical in belief, and who share the evil consequences of 
 heretical belief they, after the dissolution of the body after death, 
 attain punishment, misfortune, torture, and perdition. But, sirs, 
 those creatures that are attended by good actions of body, word 
 and thought, who speak no evil of the noble ones, and are right 
 in their belief, and who share the (good) consequences of right 
 belief they, after the dissolution of the body after death, attain 
 felicity and the heaven-world (sagga-loka-) . Thus by his divine 
 vision which is pure and transcending what is human, he doth 
 recognize that creatures follow the destiny of their deeds. This, 
 O monks, is the second knowledge attained by him; ignorance is 
 destroyed and knowledge ariseth ; darkness is destroyed and light 
 ariseth, since he doth live ardent and resolute in mind, not dis- 
 regarding Him. 
 
 ' And furthermore, O monks, by the destruction of his Taints 
 even in the world, a monk hath gained insight into the taintless 
 Emancipation of Thought and Wisdom, and doth live (having) 
 himself known and seen them face to face. This, O monks, is 
 the third knowledge attained by him; ignorance is destroyed and 
 knowledge ariseth; darkness is destroyed and light ariseth, since 
 he doth live ardent and resolute in mind, not disregarding Him. 
 Thus by the Law, O monks, do I account to be a brahman him 
 that hath threefold knowledge, and no one else that merely 
 talketh talk/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Whoso knoweth his former abode, 
 
 1 For another passage on previous existences compare 22 of this work. 
 
Il8 ITI-VUTTAKA [ IOO - 
 
 And heaven and punishment 
 
 Him do I account to be a brahman 
 
 And no one else that merely talketh talk. 1 
 
 Whoso knoweth his former abode, 
 
 And seeth heaven and punishment, 
 
 And who hath attained destruction of Birth, 
 
 Is a seer endowed with Insight. 
 
 By means of these three knowledges 
 
 A brahman becometh possessed of threefold knowledge ; 
 
 Him I call " three-knowledged," 
 
 And no one else that merely talketh talk/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 [End of the] Fifth Chapter [i. e. of the third division] 
 
 Resume 10 
 
 Pleasure (9o) 2 ; lived (91)*; a robe (92) ; 
 Fire (93)*J investigation (94) 6 ; 
 Source (95) 6 ; Lust (96)'; goodness (97) 8 ; 
 Gift (98) 9 ; by the Law (99) 10 ; these ten. 
 
 (End of the Third Division) 
 
 1 Consult note above on this section. This particular stanza is probably 
 corrupt; it is found only in B and C. For similar phraseology, compare 
 the Dhammapada, verse 423. 
 
 'Note that the stem form pasada- is used, instead of the plural, and also 
 the omission of agga-, ' chief, highest.' 
 
 8 Note that the past ptcpl. jivita-, ' lived,' is used, and not the noun jivika-, 
 ' livelihood.' 
 
 4 Note the use of the sing, instead of the plur. 
 
 5 upaparikkhayS- ; this is a manufactured form to suit the meter. The com- 
 mon expedient of giving the instrumental case is impossible here, as the final 
 foot must be an iamb. 
 
 Note the use of the sing, instead of the plur. 
 7 Note the use of the stem form kdma-. 
 
 8 We should rather expect kalyclna-sila-, 'of good character,' instead of 
 kalydna-, ' goodness.' 
 
 9 Note the use of the sing, instead of the plural. 
 
 10 This instrumental case is taken literally from the text. 
 
-100] TRANSLATION 119 
 
 ioo. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' O monks, I am a brahman devoted to begging, 1 ever pure- 
 handed, 2 wearing my final body, the incomparable Healer and 
 Physician. 3 Ye are my offspring here, born from my mouth, 
 spiritually born, created by the Law, spiritual heirs (ddyada-), 
 not material heirs. 
 
 ' There are these two kinds of gifts, O monks, namely, material 
 and spiritual gifts, and of these two, O monks, the higher is the 
 latter. 
 
 ' There are these two kinds of distribution, O monks, namely 
 material and spiritual distribution, and of these two, O monks, 
 the higher is the latter. 
 
 ' There are these two forms of kindliness, O monks, namely, 
 material and spiritual kindliness, and of these two, O monks, 
 the higher is the latter. 
 
 'There are these two forms of sacrifice, O monks, namely, 
 material and spiritual sacrifice, and of these two, O monks, the 
 higher is the latter/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' He that hath freely offered spiritual sacrifice, 
 Namely, the Consummate One, compassionate to all beings, 
 Such a one as he creatures will honor as best of gods and men, 
 And as one that hath passed beyond Existence/ 
 
 Exactly to that effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 101. * There are, O monks, these four (things) which, although 
 small and easy to obtain, are beyond reproach/ ' What four?' 
 ' A dusty heap of rags, O monks, is both small and easy to 
 obtain and is beyond reproach. Broken morsels of food, O 
 monks, are both small and easy to obtain and are beyond re- 
 
 1 yaca-yoga-, lit. ' yoked to begging ' ; we should rather expect yacana-yoga-. 
 Edmunds, who has translated this section in his Buddhist and Christian Gos- 
 pels, p. 131, renders, I think wrongly, ' suitable to beg of.' 
 
 5 pSyata-pani- ; Edmunds renders 'drinking pure drink.' 
 
 * salla-katta-, lit. 'pain-causer.' 
 
I2O ITI-VUTTAKA [IO2- 
 
 proach. The root of a tree as a dwelling 1 is both small and easy 
 to obtain and is beyond reproach. Urine that has become foul- 
 smelling as a medicine, 2 O monks, is both small and easy to 
 obtain and is beyond reproach. Verily these four (things), O 
 monks, although small and easy to obtain, are beyond reproach. 
 Since, therefore, O monks, a monk is contented with what is 
 small and easy to obtain and beyond reproach, him I declare to 
 be a higher member of the devotees/ 
 
 4 In the case of him that is contented with what is beyond 
 
 reproach, 
 
 With what is small and easy to obtain, 
 The matter of attention to his bed and his seat, 
 To his clothing, food and drink, 
 Is no obstacle to his thought, 
 Nor is he hindered by the sight of them. 
 
 And by that monk who is content and zealous 
 
 There have been acquired 
 
 Those Laws which are said to be 
 
 In accordance with the state of a devotee/ 
 
 102. ' I proclaim the destruction of the Taints, O monks, to 
 the one that knoweth and to the one that seeth, but not to the one 
 that knoweth not and seeth not. And what is Destruction of the 
 Taints, O monks, for him that knoweth and for him that seeth ? 
 To know that " This is Misery " is the Destruction of the Taints 
 for the one that knoweth and for the one that seeth. To know 
 that " This is the Origin (samudaya-) of Misery " is the De- 
 struction of the Taints for the one that knoweth and for the one 
 that seeth. To know that " This is the Cessation of Misery " is 
 the Destruction of the Taints for the one that knoweth and for 
 the one that seeth. To know that " This is the Way leading to 
 the Destruction of Misery " is the Destruction of the Taints for 
 the one that knoweth and for the one that seeth. Thus indeed, O 
 
 1 Following MSS. D, E, M, P, Pa, which read senSsanam. 
 * Following MSS. D and E, which read bhesajjatn. 
 
-103] TRANSLATION 121 
 
 monks, to the one that knoweth and to the one that seeth there 
 cometh Destruction of the Taints.' 
 
 * Of a novitiate-monk who is under disciplinary training, 
 And who is following in the Straight Path, 
 The first understanding lieth in Destruction; 
 From this (there cometh) higher knowledge. 
 
 From this (there cometh) the knowledge of Emancipation, 
 The highest understanding of Emancipation; 
 In Destruction there ariseth the understanding 
 That the Fetters are broken. 
 
 Not, however, by the slothful, 
 
 Nor by the undiscerning, 
 
 Is this Nirvana to be reached, 
 
 Which is the Deliverance from all ties/ 
 
 103. ' Whatsoever devotees or brahmans there are, O monks, 
 that do not correctly comprehend that " This is Misery " and do 
 not comprehend that " This is its Origin, its Cessation, (and) the 
 Way which leadeth to its Cessation" not mine, O monks, are 
 those devotees or brahmans, nor are they esteemed as devotees 
 or brahmans among the devotees and brahmans, nor do they, 
 when old, live, having known by themselves face to face and 
 having attained in (this) seen world the objective of devotees 
 and the objective of brahmans. 
 
 ' But whatsoever devotees or brahmans there are, O monks, 
 that do correctly comprehend that " This is Misery " and likewise 
 that " This is its Origin, its Cessation, and the Way that leadeth 
 to its Cessation" mine in truth, O monks, are those devotees 
 and brahmans, and they are, moreover, esteemed as devotees and 
 brahmans among those that are devotees and brahmans, and, when 
 old, live, having known by themselves face to face and hav- 
 ing attained in (this) seen world the objective of devotees and 
 the objective of brahmans/ 
 
 'They that do not comprehend Misery 
 And (atho) the origin of Misery 
 
122 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 104 - 
 
 And where Misery 
 Cometh wholly to nought, 
 
 And who know not the Path 
 
 Leading to the stilling of Misery 
 
 They, deprived of the Emancipation of thought 
 
 And of the Emancipation of wisdom, 
 
 Are not fit for making an end (of existence) ; 
 
 They verily undergo Birth and Old Age. 
 
 But they that do comprehend Misery 
 And the origin of Misery 
 And where Misery 
 Cometh wholly to nought, 
 
 And who know the Path 
 
 Leading to the stilling of Misery 
 
 They, endowed with Emancipation of thought 
 
 And with Emancipation of wisdom, 
 
 Are fit for making an end (of existence) ; 
 
 They do not undergo Birth and Old Age/ 
 
 104. ' Whatsoever monks are endowed with Character, are 
 endowed with Contemplation, are endowed with Wisdom, and 
 with Emancipation and the Vision that cometh from the under- 
 standing of Emancipation, O monks, (who are) givers of admoni- 
 tion, teachers, instructors, advisers, (who are) stimulating and 
 encouraging, competent expounders of the Good Law I declare 
 that associating with such monks as these, O monks, is exceed- 
 ing helpful, and so likewise the hearing, approaching, and attend- 
 ing upon such monks as these, as well as being mindful (of the 
 commands) of these monks, and also imitating them in renunci- 
 ation/ ' Why is this ? ' ' Since by honoring and worshiping and 
 attending upon monks of such a character, (an individual), 
 though imperfect in the Attributes of his Character, goeth to 
 perfection of Devotion, and, though imperfect in the Attributes 
 of Wisdom, goeth to perfection of Devotion, and, though im- 
 perfect in the Attributes of Emancipation, goeth to perfection of 
 
-105] TRANSLATION 1 23 
 
 Devotion, and, though imperfect in the Wisdom that cometh from 
 the understanding of Emancipation, goeth to perfection of 
 Devotion. 
 
 1 Monks of such a nature as these, O monks, are called " teach- 
 ers, carriers of teaching, forsakers of strife, dispellers of dark- 
 ness, givers of splendor, radiance, brightness, torch-bearers, 
 givers of light, noble, men with eyes." ! 
 
 ' Those that have discrimination, namely, 
 Those with devoted minds, noble, 
 Those who live according to the Law 
 They, I say, have a position that doth cause rejoicing. 
 
 They glorify the Good Law, 
 They are givers of light and illumination, 
 Givers of splendor and wise are they, 
 Far-seeing, forsakers of strife. 
 
 Wise men, through having heard their teaching, 
 And through having right knowledge, 
 And through Insight into the destruction of Birth, 
 Do not attain Re-existence/ 
 
 105. * There are, O monks, these four (sources of) creation 1 
 of Thirst, whereby Thirst, being created, doth spring up within 
 a monk/ 'What four?' 'Because of his dress, O monks, 
 Thirst being created doth spring up within a monk; because of 
 food received within his bowl, O monks, Thirst being created 
 doth spring up within a monk; because of his bed and seat, O 
 monks, Thirst being created doth spring up within a monk; 
 because of repeated existence, 2 O monks, Thirst being created 
 doth spring up within a monk. These verily, O monks, are the 
 four (sources of) the creation of Thirst, which being created do 
 spring up within a monk/ 
 
 ' A man accompanied by Thirst 
 Undergoeth transmigration for a long time 
 
 1 uppSda-, lit. ' springing up, coming into being.* 
 
 2 itibhfivabhava- ; the iti at the beginning of this compound is evidently a 
 gloss of ittha- in line c. 
 
124 ITI-VUTTAKA [K>5- 
 
 And doth not pass beyond transmigration 
 
 With its manifold existences (lit. such and other existences). 
 
 Thus having known the distressing origin 
 
 Of the Misery of Thirst, 
 
 A monk that is freed from Thirst and without Attachment 
 
 (anadana-), 
 Wandereth forth thoughtful as a recluse (pari-vraj-) .' 
 
 I06. 1 ' Those are brahman-like families, O monks, in whose 
 exalted house 2 parents are honored by their children. Those 
 families are like unto the ancient divinities, O monks, in whose 
 exalted house parents are honored by their children. Those fam- 
 ilies, O monks, are like unto the ancient teachers, O monks, in 
 whose exalted house parents are honored by their children. 
 Those families are like unto the worshipful, O monks, in 
 whose exalted house parents are honored by their children. The 
 appellation of such parents, O monks, is " Brahmans." The ap- 
 pellation of such parents, O monks, is " Ancient Divinities." 
 The appellation of such parents, O monks, is " Ancient Teachers." 
 The appellation of such parents, O monks, is " Worshipful." ' 
 ' Why is this ? ' ' Exceeding helpful, O monks, are such parents 
 to their children; they cause success, they give nourishment, 
 (they are) guiders of this world/ 
 
 ' Parents who have kindly feeling 
 Toward their offspring, are called 
 " Brahmans," " Ancient Teachers," 
 " Worthy of oblation from their children." 
 
 Therefore, moreover, a wise man should honor 
 And revere them, both with food and drink, 
 And with raiment, bed, ointment, and bath, 
 And by washing their feet. 
 
 1 Compare Windisch's footnote on this section, giving a comparison with 
 the Anguttara Nikaya. 
 
 *ajjhagare; I compare this word with Skt. adhi, 'over, above,' and agara-, 
 ' house, residence,' making a tatptirtisa compound. See Whitney, Skt. Gram., 
 1263 a. 
 
-I08] TRANSLATION 125 
 
 On account of this ministration 
 
 Unto his parents, him they praise 
 
 As " wise " e'en here (on earth) ; 
 
 When he hath gone hence, he doth rejoice in heaven/ 
 
 107. ' Exceeding helpful to you, O monks, are brahman 
 householders who present you with garments, offerings (pinda~ 
 pata-), beds, seats, requisites for sickness, medicines, and uten- 
 sils. And ye verily, O monks, are exceeding helpful to the brah- 
 man householders, for ye point out to them the Law of their 
 first, middle, and last good actions, and ye do proclaim unto 
 them the life of Chastity, with its meaning and its characteristics, 
 absolutely complete and perfect. Thus by mutual reliance, O 
 monks, a life of Chastity is lived for the sake of crossing the 
 Flood (of earthly longings), and for the sake of properly making 
 an end of Misery/ 
 
 ' Both those with houses and those without houses, 
 Being mutually dependent upon each other, 
 Do exalt the Good Law, 
 Which is Security unsurpassed. 
 
 And from them that have houses the houseless 
 Receive clothes, requisites (for sickness), 
 Beds and seats, 
 Shelter and entertainment. 
 
 Through reliance, moreover, on the Auspicious One, 
 Both householders and those without houses 
 Have Faith in the Sanctified One 
 And meditate with noble wisdom. 
 
 Having here (on earth) fulfilled the Law, 
 The Path that leadeth to Felicity, 
 They rejoice within the world of the gods, 
 (For) they follow (lit. they lust) their Lusts, 1 and take joy 
 therein/ 
 
 1 08. ' Whatsoever monks are deceitful and obstinate, O 
 
 1 kama- is apparently here not used in the usual bad acceptation. 
 
1 26 ITI-VUTTAKA [ IO8 - 
 
 monks, are chatterers, wavering, proud, 1 not self -composed 
 these are not my monks and they are departed, O monks, from 
 this Discipline (vinaya-) of the Law, and they do not attain 
 growth, increase, or development in the Discipline of the Law. 2 
 But on the other hand, O monks, those monks that are not deceit- 
 ful, not chatterers, steadfast, tractable, well-composed, verily 
 they are my monks; they have not departed from the Discipline 
 of the Law, and they have attained growth, increase, and devel- 
 opment in the Discipline of the Law/ 
 
 * Deceitful, obstinate, chatterers, wavering, 
 Proud, not self -composed 
 
 They increase not in the Law which is pointed out 
 By the Perfectly Enlightened One. 
 
 Not deceitful, not chatterers, steadfast, 
 
 Tractable, well-composed 
 
 They verily increase in the Law which is pointed out 
 
 By the Perfectly Enlightened One/ 
 
 109. l Just as, 3 O monks, a man carried away by the flood of 
 a river of pleasant and delightful aspect should a spectator on 
 the shore see him, he (the spectator) would say: "Ho there! 
 Why art thou carried away by the flood of this stream of pleas- 
 ant and delightful aspect? For there is below there a lake with 
 waves, whirlpools, crocodiles, and demons! When thou hast 
 
 1 unnala-, lit. ' with the stalk raised up.' D'Alwis renders ' evil-disposed,' 
 and Childers, Pali Diet., s. v., quotes the commentary on the Dhammapada, 
 verse 52, where we read tesam mananalam ukkhipitva curanena unnalanam, ' to 
 them who are called unnala because they walk uplifting the reed of pride.' 
 
 9 It will be noticed that out of the six evil attributes assigned to the monks 
 in this paragraph, only five are paralleled with an opposite signification of 
 goodness in the paragraph which follows. The one not so paralleled is singt- f 
 lit. 'horned,' which I have rendered 'wavering,' assuming that the idea in 
 the mind of the writer is deviousness or crookedness of character. Notice 
 further the different order of words in the list of the corresponding good 
 qualities which follows. 
 
 *seyyatha, a word of uncertain etymology used to introduce a simile, or 
 comparison, which in this particular section begins with the sentence further 
 down, starting upama kho me, ' this is my simile.' The word occurs also in 
 91 and 99. See Childers, Pali Diet., s. v. 
 
-IIO] TRANSLATION 
 
 gone into that lake, O man, thou wilt meet with death, or with 
 misery which is merely death." Then, forsooth, that man, on 
 hearing these words, O monks, would struggle against the flood 
 with hands and feet. 
 
 ' This simile, O monks, is made for the conveying of a mean- 
 ing. And this is the meaning : " The flood of the river " is the 
 designation of Thirst; "pleasant and delightful in aspect" is, 
 allegorically, the designation of private dwellings ; " a lake be- 
 low " is the designation of the five bonds of sensual life 1 ; " with 
 waves " is the designation of the frenzy of anger ; " with whirl- 
 pools " is the designation of the five varieties of Lust ; " with 
 crocodiles and demons " is the designation of womankind ; 
 " against the flood " is the designation of Separation (nek- 
 khamma-) ; " struggling with hands and feet " is the designation 
 of the exertion of one's strength ; " the spectator standing on the 
 shore " is the designation of the Consummate One, the Sanctified 
 One, the Perfectly Enlightened One/ 
 
 * When one hath forsaken Lusts with their Misery, 
 Seeking after Security in future, 2 
 Of right comprehension, with mind well emancipated, 
 One may, in just this wise, experience Emancipation. 
 He that is versed in the Veda, and liveth chastely, 
 Is called " a goer to the end of the world, one that hath crossed 
 over." ' 
 
 no. ' If as he walketh, there ariseth in a monk the idea of 
 Lust, or the idea of Malevolence, or the idea of Cruelty, 3 O 
 monks, and if the monk yield to this, and doth not forsake nor 
 dispel it, nor banish it to non-existence, 4 a monk of such a charac- 
 
 1 orambhSgiya-, Skt. avara-, ' lower,' and bhagya-, ' something to be divided, 
 lot, portion.' 
 
 3 ayatim; so I prefer to read, following S, taking it as ace. of time. Com- 
 pare the Skt. ayati-. All other MSS. read ayati. 
 
 8 Compare this section with a similar passage in 87. 
 
 4 andbhava-; this word seems to be a double negative, being the same in 
 meaning as abhava- ; compare the Greek avaeSvof, and see Vinaya Texts, vol. 
 2, SB E. 17, page 113- 
 
1 28 ITI-VUTTAKA [ 1 10 - 
 
 ter is called slothful, f reward, constantly and continually indolent, 
 deficient in strength. 
 
 ' If as he is seated, there ariseth in a monk the idea of Lust, 
 or the idea of Malevolence, or the idea of Cruelty, O monks, and 
 if the monk yield to this, and doth not forsake or dispel it, nor 
 banish it to non-existence a monk of such a character is called 
 slothful, f reward, constantly and continually indolent, deficient in 
 strength. 
 
 'If as he reclineth, there ariseth in a monk the idea of Lust, 
 or the idea of Malevolence, or the idea of Cruelty, O monks, and 
 if the monk yield to this, and doth not forsake or dispel it, nor 
 banish it to non-existence a monk of such a character is called 
 slothful, froward, constantly and continually indolent, deficient 
 in strength. 
 
 ' (But) if as he walketh, there ariseth in a monk the idea of 
 Lust, or the idea of Malevolence, or the idea of Cruelty, O monks, 
 and if the monk doth not yield to this, but doth forsake and dispel 
 it, and doth banish it to non-existence a monk of such a charac- 
 ter is called ardent, not froward, constantly and continually 
 strenuous, intent in mind. 
 
 ' (But) if as he staddeth, there ariseth in a monk the idea of 
 Lust, or the idea of Malevolence, or the idea of Cruelty, O monks, 
 and if the monk doth not yield to this, but doth forsake and dispel 
 it, and doth banish it to non-existence a monk of such a charac- 
 ter is called ardent, not froward, constantly and continually stren- 
 uous, intent in mind. 
 
 ' (But) if as he is seated, there ariseth in a monk the idea of 
 Lust, or the idea of Malevolence, or the idea of Cruelty, O monks, 
 and if the monk doth not yield to this, but doth forsake and dispel 
 it, and doth banish it to non-existence a monk of such character 
 is called ardent, not froward, constantly and continually strenu- 
 ous, intent in mind. 
 
 ' (But) if as he reclineth, there ariseth in a monk the idea of 
 Lust, or the idea of Malevolence, or the idea of Cruelty, O monks, 
 and if the monk doth not accept this, but doth forsake and dispel 
 it, and doth banish it to non-existence a monk of such a charac- 
 
- 1 1 1 ] TRANSLATION 1 29 
 
 ter is called ardent, not f reward, constantly and continually stren- 
 uous, intend in mind.' 
 
 ' If while either walking or standing, 
 Or while sitting or reclining, 
 A monk doth reflect upon an idea 
 Which is evil or connected with household life (gehanissita-) , 
 
 Having entered upon the path that is evil, 
 And having become infatuated with Delusion 
 Such a monk as this is not able 
 To experience Supreme Enlightenment. 
 
 But if, while either walking or standing, 
 
 Or while sitting or reclining, 
 
 A monk doth have control over his ideas, 
 
 And is delighted by the quiescence (upasama-) of his ideas 
 
 Such a monk as this is able 
 
 To experience Supreme Enlightenment/ 
 
 in. 'Do ye live, O monks, endowed with Character; do ye 
 live endowed with the Precepts, 1 restrained by the restraint of the 
 Precepts, endowed with a wide range of good behavior, seeing 
 danger in the smallest faults, and do ye exercise yourselves in 
 the Subjects of Study, having taken them upon yourselves. What 
 would be, O monks, the higher duty of monks living endowed 
 with Character, endowed with the Precepts, endowed with a wide 
 range of good behavior, seeing danger in the smallest faults, and 
 who exercise themselves in the Subjects of Study, having taken 
 them upon themselves? If, moreover, while he walketh, a monk 
 hath become devoid of Covetousness, and likewise of Malevo- 
 lence, Sloth, Torpor, Vanity, 2 and Moroseness, and hath got the 
 best of vacillation, his strength when exerted becometh unfailing, 
 his ready memory becometh not dulled, his body in repose is not 
 exerted, his thoughts are composed and collected; a monk of 
 such a character, O monks, even while walking, is called " ardent, 
 
 1 See page 113, note 2. 
 
 8 uddhacca-kukkucca-, Skt. auddhatya-kaukatya-. 
 
 IO 
 
13O 1TI-VUTTAKA [ III - 
 
 not froward, constantly and continually strenuous, intent in 
 mind." 
 
 ' And if, moreover, while he standeth, a monk hath become 
 devoid of Covetousness, and likewise of Malevolence, Sloth, Tor- 
 por, Vanity, and Moroseness, and hath got the best of vacillation, 
 his strength when exerted becometh unfailing, his ready memory 
 becometh not dulled, his body in repose is not exerted, his 
 thoughts are composed and collected ; a monk of such a character, 
 O monks, even while standing, is called " ardent, not froward, 
 constantly and continually strenuous, intent in mind." 
 
 'And if, moreover, while he is seated, a monk hath become 
 devoid of Covetousness, and likewise of Malevolence, Sloth, Tor- 
 por, Vanity, and Moroseness, and hath got the best of vacillation, 
 his strength when exerted becometh unfailing, his ready memory 
 becometh not dulled, his body in repose is not exerted, his thoughts 
 are composed and collected; a monk of such a character, O 
 monks, even while being seated, is called " ardent, not froward, 
 constantly and continually strenuous, intent in mind." 
 
 'And if, moreover, while he reclineth wakeful, a monk hath 
 become devoid of Covetousness, and likewise of Malevolence, 
 Sloth, Torpor, Vanity, and Moroseness, and hath got the best of 
 vacillation, his strength when exerted becometh unfailing, his 
 ready memory becometh not dulled, his body in repose is not 
 exerted, his thoughts are composed and collected; a monk of 
 such a character, O monks, even while reclining, is called " ardent, 
 not froward, constantly and continually strenuous, intent in 
 mind." ' 
 
 ' A monk should walk and stand restrainedly, 
 
 Should sit and recline restrainedly, 
 
 Should bend (his limbs) restrainedly 
 
 And should stretch himself 1 restrainedly 
 
 Upwards, across, and sideways. 
 
 Just as the course of the universe (jagat-) is regarded, 
 
 So is the rise and decay 2 
 
 1 1 take enam reflexively, although I can find no parallel of such usage in 
 Pali or in Sanskrit. 
 
 3 The same doublet occurs in Dhp., verses 113, 374. 
 
- 1 1 2 ] TRANSLATION 1 3 I 
 
 Of the Attributes of things. 
 
 Such a monk, living in this wise, 
 Being ardent, reposeful in manner, 
 Not vaunting himself (lit. not puffed up) 
 With propriety and tranquillity of soul, 
 Ever mindful of his Subjects of Study 
 Him they call " Constantly intent in mind." ' 
 
 112. This verily was said by the Blessed One, said by the 
 Sanctified One, so I have heard. 
 
 ' The world, O monks, hath been thoroughly understood by the 
 Consummate One (tathagata-) ; from the world the Consummate 
 One is wholly detached ; the Origin of the world, O monks, hath 
 been thoroughly understood by the Consummate One, and it hath 
 been cast aside (pahlna) by him; 1 the Cessation of the world, O 
 monks, hath been thoroughly understood by the Consummate One, 
 and it hath been realized 2 by him ; the Way leading to the Cessa- 
 tion of the world, O monks, hath been thoroughly understood by 
 the Consummate One, and hath been attained by him. 
 
 * Whatever, O monks, hath been heard, thought, 3 felt, obtained, 
 sought, pondered on in the mind, about the world with its gods, 
 its Mara (the tempter), its brahma, its race of devotees and brah- 
 rnans since (all) this is thoroughly understood by the Consum- 
 mate One, for that reason he is called Consummate. 
 
 ' (Between) the night, O monks, in which the Consummate 
 One obtained Incomparable Supreme Enlightenment, and the 
 night in which he obtaineth Complete Nirvana (parinibbana-) 
 through the element of Nirvana which hath no Substrata remain- 
 ingall that which he speaketh, uttereth, and declareth cometh 
 
 *A genitive case used apparently with the force of an instrumental. 
 
 a sacchikaroti ; this verb is translated in Childers, Pali Diet., s. v., 'to bring 
 before one's eyes, to experience.' I should compare it with the Skt. saksi-kr-, 
 which Bohtlingk and Roth render ' zum Zeugen anrufen.' In Neumann, Bud- 
 dhistische Ar.thologie, p. 235, this whole section is translated, and this particu- 
 lar word is rendered ' verwirklicht.' 
 
 * muta-, participle of the verb munati, Skt. man-. For change of a to u, 
 Franke, Pali und Sanskrit, p. 103. 
 
132 ITI-VUTTAK A [ 1 1 2 - 
 
 absolutely to pass (and) it cometh to pass just so and not other- 
 wise ; for that reason he is called Consummate. 
 
 ' Just as the Consummate One speaketh, O monks, so he doeth ; 
 just as the Consummate One doeth, so he speaketh ; inasmuch as 
 he doeth as he speaketh and speaketh as he doeth, for that reason 
 he is called Consummate. In the world, O monks, with its gods, 
 its Mara, its brahma, its race of devotees and brahmans, the Con- 
 summate is surpassing, unsurpassed, comprehending the purposes 
 of others, 1 all-powerful therefore is he called Consummate/ 
 
 To this effect spake the Blessed One, and hereupon said the 
 following : 
 
 ' Having Insight into all the world, 
 Into all the worlds exactly, 
 Detached from all the world, 
 In all the world without compare 
 
 All-surpassing in everything, steadfast, 
 
 Freed from all ties, 
 
 The highest Repose belongeth to him 
 
 Having attained Nirvana, with no fear from any side. 
 
 This Enlightened One, with Taints destroyed, 
 Scatheless (amgha-), having severed (the bonds) of doubt, 
 Hath attained destruction of all actions (kamma-) 
 (And) is released from the destruction of the Substrata. 
 
 This same Blessed and Enlightened One, 
 This lion beyond compare, 
 Hath set the Wheel of Brahma in motion 
 For the world with its gods ". 
 
 Thinking this, the gods and men 
 
 Who have gone to Buddha for refuge, 
 
 Will worship him, after going, 
 
 As " The Great One that hath transcended Time, 
 
 The Victorious One, best of those victorious, 
 Reposeful, Sage of those reposeful. 
 
 1 annadatthu dasa- ; see the note on this word, page 35, note 6. 
 
112] TRANSLATION 133 
 
 Emancipated, highest of those emancipated, 
 The One that hath crossed, best of those that have 
 crossed ". 
 
 Thinking this they will worship him 
 
 As " The Great One that hath transcended Time "; 
 
 Nor is there in the world with its gods 
 
 Any One thy equal/ 
 
 Exactly to this effect was it spoken by the Blessed One, so I 
 have heard. 
 
 End of Part Four 
 
 Resume n 
 
 After brahman ( 100) ; four ( 101); knowing ( IO2) 1 ; 
 Devotee ( 103) ; Character ( 104) ; Thirst ( 105) ; brahman 
 
 ( io6); 
 
 Exceeding helpful ( 107) ; deceit ( io8) 3 ;men ( 109)*; 
 Walking ( no) ; possessed of ( in) 5 ; by the world ( 112)'; 
 
 these ten. 
 
 [End of] the hundred and twelfth section of the Iti-vuttaka 
 END OF THE ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 1 Present participle instead of the past participle. 
 
 3 We should expect sabrahmaka of the text. 
 
 3 Note the use of the noun instead of the adjective. 
 
 * Note the plural instead of the singular in the text. 
 
 5 The important noun of the text, sila-, which is modified by sampanna-, 
 f possessed of,' is not given. 
 
 'Note the use of the instrumental case instead of the nominative, on 
 account of the meter. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX 
 
 (The numbers refer to pages. Cardinal Buddhistic terms are given with 
 their Pali equivalents) 
 
 Actions painful to Buddha, 45 
 Actions not painful to Buddha, 45 
 Advantage, anisamsa-, 48, 59 
 Aggregates, the, samkhara-, 81, 99 
 All, the, sabba-, 24 
 Anger, khoda-, 3, 23, 27 
 Arrangement of the Iti-vuttaka, i 
 Arrow, simile of the, 87 
 Association, sahavasa-, 87 
 Association, or contact, samsagga-, 90 
 Attachment, anadana-, 124 
 Attributes, khanda-, 29, 70, 122, 131 
 
 Chief possession, the, 115 
 
 Clinging to existence, 94 
 
 Complete Nirvana, parinibbana-, 131 
 
 Connection between sections, 6 
 
 Consideration, vitakka-, 92 
 
 Construction of the Iti-vuttaka, 7 
 
 Consummate One, a glorification of, 
 
 131, 132, 133 
 Contact, samsagga-, 90 
 Contemplation, samadhi-, 70, 71, 94, 
 
 1 06 
 
 Covetousness, abhijjha-, 129, 130 
 Craving, esana-, 67, 68 
 Cruelty, vihimsa-, 101, 127, 128 
 
 Belief, ditthi-, 46, 62, 63, 79, 80, 81 
 
 Birth, 52, 54, in 
 
 Body, the, 56 
 
 Brahma, 35, 78 
 
 Brahmans and devotees, 121 
 
 Brahman householders, 3, 125 
 
 Buddhaghosa, 2 
 
 Capitalization of cardinal words, 18 
 
 Caste (?), vanna-, 107 
 
 Cessation, nirodha-, 81, 82, 106, 120, 
 
 121, 131 
 Chain of Causation, paticca-samup- 
 
 panna-, 81 
 Character, sila-, 46, 70, 71, 87, 98, 
 
 114, 129 
 
 Charity, dona-, 3, 35, 38, 39, 71, 85, 86 
 Chastity, brahmacariya-, 48, 62, 67, 
 
 68, 97, 98, 125 
 Cheerful, pamudita-, 60 
 
 Death, 60 
 
 Decrease, parihana-, 59 
 Deliverance, nissarana-, 81 
 Delusion, moha-, 22, 27, 28, 29, 64, 77, 
 
 78, 102, 103, no, in, 129 
 Desire, lobha-, 21, 25, 53, 54, 64, 102 
 Detachment from the world, 114 
 Deterioration in a monk's character, 
 
 90 
 
 Devadatta, the arch-sinner, 103, 104 
 Devotion, bhavana-, 71, 94, 114, I22 
 Dialogue form of the Iti-vuttaka, 9 
 Difficulties of translation, 18 
 Discernment, vipassana-, 21-28, 58 
 Discipline, vinaya-, 114 
 Discrimination, nibbedha-, 54 
 Distribution, material and spiritual, 
 
 US, H9 
 
 Eightfold Path, the, 37, 106 
 Element, dhatu-, 56, 58, 81, 82, 99 
 
 135 
 
136 
 
 ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 Emancipation, vimutti-, 40, 59, 60, 
 
 114, 122 
 
 Epithets of Buddha, 4 
 Essential, the, vatthu-, 71 
 Evil actions, duccarita-, 75, 76 
 Existence, bhava-, 54, 57, 58, 63, 68, 
 
 69, 70, 81 
 
 External, bahira-, 30 
 Eyes, the three, 72 
 
 Faculty, indriya-, 36, 71, 73 
 
 Faith, saddha-, 96, 106 
 
 Falsehood, intentional, sampajana- 
 
 musavada-, 38 
 
 Fear of sinning, ottappa-, 53, 55 
 Feeling, vedana-, 66 
 Fetters, the, samyojana-, 31, 38, 41, 
 
 48, 73, 92, 121 
 
 Figures of speech, n, 12, 13 
 Form, rupa-, 81, 82 
 Formulas in the text, 8 
 Friendliness, 3, 40, 41, 42 
 Funeral torch, simile of, 108 
 
 G 
 
 Gain, labha-, 92 
 
 Genuine, akuppa-, 73 
 
 Gifts, material and spiritual, 115, 117 
 
 Good actions, 80 
 
 Goodness, kalyana-, 30 
 
 Grammatical survey, 16 
 
 Greater and lesser laws, 100 
 
 Happiness, sukkha-, 36, 71, 72, 87 
 Hardness of heart, anottappa-, 53 
 Hate, dosa-, 22, 26, 64, 77, 78, 102, 
 
 no, in 
 
 Healer, Brahma the, 119 
 Heaven as a reward, 34 
 Highest Dharma, 52 
 Hope, devoid of, nirasa-, 68 
 Humanity, manussata-, 39, 96 
 Hypocrisy, makkha-, 23, 28 
 
 Idea, vitakka-, 92 
 
 Ignorance, avijja-, 53, 54, 69, 78 
 
 Impropriety, akusala-, 64 
 
 Inclination, anusaya-, 99 
 
 Indestructible, the, 75 
 
 Inhalation and exhalation, anapana-, 
 
 99 
 Insight, abhinna-, 48, 49, 67, 81, 100, 
 
 123, 132 
 
 Intellection, vinnana-, 88, in 
 Intemperance, 43 
 Inter-canonical quotation, 15 
 Internal quotation, 14 
 Iti-vuttaka, meaning of the name, i 
 
 Kindliness, material and spiritual, 115, 
 
 119 
 
 King of Death, 78 
 Knowledge, anna-, 73 
 
 Law, the, 107 
 Like seeks like, 89 
 Longing, iccha-, 53 
 Lust, kama-, 3, 68, 69, 100, 109, 112, 
 113, 125, 127, 128 
 
 Magadha, a locality, 37 
 
 Maha Brahma, 35 
 
 Malevolence, vyapada-, 107, 127, 128, 
 
 129, 130 
 Mara, the Tempter, 69, 70, 74, 77, 
 
 94, in, 131, 132 
 Mass, a, samussaya-, 68 
 Materials for acquisition of virtue, 
 
 punna-kiriya-vatthu-, 39 
 Meditation, jhana-, 59, 60 
 Modesty, 3 
 Morning-star, the, 40 
 Moroseness, vicikicchfi-, 129 130 
 
ENGLISH INDEX 
 
 137 
 
 Name and form, 54 
 
 Negative principle, the, 56 
 
 Nirvana, 47, 48, 49, 57, 58, 59, 69, 
 100, 101, 106, 112, 121, 132 
 
 Noble Faith, the, 106 
 
 Noble Truths, the, 37 
 
 Non-deterioration in a monk's charac- 
 ter, 90 
 
 Non-injury, abyabajjha-, 51 
 
 Non-returning, anagamita-, 59, 60 
 
 Novitiate monk, sekkha-, 29, 30 
 
 Ocean, the, 78 
 
 Old age, 52 
 
 One's own affairs, sakkara-, 48, 92, 93, 
 
 94 
 
 Order, the, 31, 32, 106, 107 
 Order of Buddhistic time, 73, 74 
 
 Passion, raga-, 3, 77, 78, 81, 99, 
 
 in 
 
 Past and present, 63 
 Path, the Holy, 122 
 Pindola, a disciple, 107, 108 
 Pleasant and painful feelings, 66 
 Pleasure, pam3da- t 59 
 Poetry in the Iti-vuttaka, 10 
 Poison, simile of, 104 
 Pool, simile of the, no 
 Preceptor, acariya-, 54 
 Precepts, the, patimokkha-, 113, 129 
 Predestined, abhabba-, 59 
 Pretas, the departed spirits, in 
 Pride, 3, 24; (in a good sense) 108 
 Proper vision, sammadasa-, 69, 81 
 Punishment, 61, 62 
 Purification, socceyya-, 76 
 
 Qualities, the two upright, 47 
 Qualities of superior-born, equal-born 
 
 and inferior-bora, children, 82, 
 
 83, 84 
 
 Quiescence, upasama-, 129 
 Quintessence, sara-, 59 
 
 Rain in a figure of speech, 85 
 
 Rebirth, 63 
 
 Recluse, parivraj-, 124 
 
 Recluse life, p&tisallana-, 58, 59 
 
 Re-existence, punabbhava-, 82, in, 
 
 113, 123 
 
 Refuges, the, 83 
 
 Relation between prose and verse, 9 
 Relative character of the Teacher, the 
 
 disciple, and the novitiate, 98, 
 
 99 
 
 Release, vimokka-, 75, 95 
 Renunciation, pahana-, 48 
 Repetition of passages, 7, 9 
 Repose, santi-, 73, 100, 101, no, 132 
 Reputation, siloka-, 48, 92 
 Respect shown to parents, 124 
 Restraint, 48 
 Resumes, the, 4, 5, 6, 26, 33, 42, 43, 
 
 50, 51, 64, 71, 79, 9i, 92, 105, 
 
 n8, 133 
 
 Revolution aeons, 116 
 River, allegory of the, 126 
 
 S 
 
 Sacrifice, material and spiritual, 119 
 Sacrifices, the horse, human, sam- 
 
 mapasa, and vajapeyya, 41, 42 
 Sage, muni-, 67 
 Sakka, ruler of the gods, 35 
 Samvat aeons, 116 
 Sapience, vijjH-, 99 
 Seclusion, viveka-, 52 
 Self-command, dama-, 35 
 Self-control, sannama-, 35 
 Sense organs, 59, 73 
 Separation, nekkhamma-, 81, 101, 127 
 Serenity, virago,-, 106, 107 
 Serenity in the Highest, agga-pasada-, 
 
 105 
 
 Seven Laws, the, 94 
 Seven years of a prior existence, 35 
 
138 
 
 ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 Shame, S3, 55 
 
 Shamelessness, 53 
 
 Silence, moneyya-, 77 
 
 Sin, papa-, 53 
 
 Sinful longings, 103, 104 
 
 Sins of omission and commission, 45, 
 
 46 
 
 Six senses, the, 43, 44 
 Sloth, thinamiddha-, 129, 130 
 Society, vagga-, 31 
 Solitude, paviveka-, 51 
 Soul, atta-, 1 06 
 Sources of lust, 112 
 Stanzas not addressed to laity, 15 
 Subjects of belief, ditthi-tthana-, 68 
 Subjects of study, sakkapada-, 114, 129 
 Subtle, sukhuma-, 94 
 Substrata, upadhi-, 39, 40, 41, 57, 59, 
 
 60, 69, 88, 97, 131, 132 
 Substrata, getting rid of the, n*HJ- 
 
 padhi-, 65, 82 
 Sumedha, a mountain, 52 
 Summum Bonum, the, uttama-attha-, 
 
 30 
 Supreme Enlightenment, 47, 48, 91, 
 
 94, 95, 131 
 
 Supreme Man, the, 113 
 Supreme Security, yogakkhema-, 30, 
 
 31, 32, 47, 51, 52, 70, 125 
 
 Time, addha-, 74, 75 
 
 Titles of Buddha, 14 
 
 Toddy, 1 02 n. i 
 
 Tranquil behavior, samacariya-, 36, 72 
 
 Tranquillity, samatha-, 99 
 
 Transformation, Law of, viparin&ma-, 
 
 88 
 
 Transgression, Qdlnava-, 29 
 Transmigration, samsara-, 29, 37, 70, 
 
 in 
 
 True Law, the, 96, 97, 100 
 Truth, 3 
 Two welfares, the, 36, 37 
 
 Understanding, nana-, 73 
 Universal monarch, cakka-vatti-, 35 
 Unseemliness, anattha-, 102 
 
 Vanity, uddhaccakukkucca-, 129, 130 
 Veda, the, in, 113, 127 
 Veda, study of the, 75 
 Vedic plurals, 16 
 Virtue, punna-, 3, 34, 36, 41 
 Virtuous deeds, punna-kiriya-, 71 
 Vocabulary of the Iti-vuttaka, 17 
 Vulture Peak, a mountain, 4, 37 
 
 Tagara plant, the, 88 
 
 Taints, the, asava, 7, 52, 65, 69, 76, 77, 
 
 82, 98, 113, 114, 117, 120, 132 
 Tal fruit, the, 102 
 Temperance, 44 
 Text, size of the, i 
 Thirst, tanha-, 29, 52, 68, 106, 127 
 Thirst, physical, pipasa-, 106 
 Three kinds of sons, 83 
 Threefold knowledge, 117, 118 
 Thorough knowledge, parinna- f 48, 49, 
 
 75 
 
 w 
 
 Watchfulness, jagara-, 61 
 Waveless perdition, 104 
 Wisdom, panna-, 54, 70, 71, 114 
 Word, the, vacana-, 53 
 
 Yearning, chanda-, 54 
 
 Zeal, appamada-, 36, 59 
 
PALI INDEX 
 
 (The numbers refer to pages. Where reference is made to notes, the English 
 equivalent is not given) 
 
 akuppa- t genuine, 73 
 
 akusala-, impropriety, 64 
 
 akkheyya-, 74 n. 6 
 
 agamissa-, 55 n. 2 
 
 agga-pasada-, 105 n. 6 
 
 ajjhaga, 89 n. 2 
 
 ajjhattam, 58 n. 2 
 
 ajjhagare, 124. n. 2 
 
 ajjhavasati, 95 n. I 
 
 annathatta-, 31 n. I 
 
 annadatthadasa, 35 n. 6; 132 n. I 
 
 anna-, knowledge, 73 
 
 annatavindriyam, 73 n. 3 
 
 attiyamana-, 63 n, i 
 
 all-, anu-, ava-jata-, 83 n. i 
 
 atipata-, 83 n. 2 
 
 atidhavanti, 62 n. 2 
 
 atekiccha-, 103 n. 2 
 
 atta-, soul, 1 06 
 
 adlnava-, transgression, 29 
 
 aduttha-, 104 n. 6 
 
 addha-, 74 n. 3 
 
 adhi-gahetva, 40 n. 2 
 
 anattha-, unseemliness, 102 
 
 anabhava-, 127 n. 4 
 
 anavannatti, 92 n. 3 
 
 anagamita, not-returning, 21 n. i ; 59 
 
 anadana-, attachment, 124 
 
 anasava-, taintless, 65 n. 2; 77, 114 
 
 anitiham, 48 n. 2 
 
 anuddayata-, 92 n. 4 
 
 anupariyaga, 41 n. i 
 
 anusaya-, inclination, 99 
 
 antara apadi, 103 n. 5 
 
 apaya-, 61 n. 3 
 
 appamada-, zeal, 36 n. 4 ; 59 
 
 abyabajjha-, non-injury, 51 n. 4 
 
 abhabba-, predestined, 59 
 
 abhijja-, covetousness, 129 
 
 abhijjhalu, 109 n. 2 
 
 abhinna-, insight, 48, 49, 67, 81, 100, 
 
 123, 132 
 
 abhinivajjetva, 100 n. 2 
 abhilapa-, 107 n. 2 
 amattannuta-, 43 n. 4 
 avijja-, ignorance, 53, 69, 78 
 asamklra, 96 n. 2 
 
 Zgantaro, 25 n. 2 
 
 anapana-, inhalation and exhalation, 
 
 99 
 
 anisamsa-, advantage, 48, 59 n. 2 
 apajja-, 104 n. 3 
 Qsava-, taint, 7, 52, 65, 69, 76, 77, 82, 
 
 98, 113, 114, 117, 120, 132 
 Gyatim, 127 n. 2 
 Qhara-netti, 56 n. 3, 58 n. i. 
 
 iccha-, longing, 53 
 
 itibhavabhava-, 123 n. 2 
 
 idam, 54 n. i 
 
 indriya-, faculty, 36, 71 n. 4; 73 n. 5 
 
 imaya kampaya, 97 n. 2 
 
 uttama-attha-, Summum Bonum, 30 
 
 utthana-, 86 n. 6 
 
 uddana, 4, 5, 6, 26, 33, 42, 43, 50, 
 
 51, 64, 7i, 79, 9i, 92, 105, 118, 
 
 133 
 
 139 
 
140 
 
 ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 uddhacca-kukkucca, 129 n. 2, 130 
 
 unnala-, 126 n. i 
 
 upadana-, clinging to existence, 94 
 
 upadhi-, 39, 57, 58, 60, 69, 88, 97 
 
 upapatti-, 121 n. I 
 
 upaparikkhaya, 118 n. 5 
 
 upasama-, quiescence, 37 n. 3; 129 
 
 uppajjati, 99 n. 2 
 
 uppada-, 72 n. 2 ; 123 n. i 
 
 
 
 ekodibhiite, 61 n. 2 
 ejanuga, no n. i 
 enam, 130 n. i 
 
 -, craving, 7, 67, 68 
 
 ottapa-, 53 
 
 cramattaka-, 103 n. 4 
 orambhagiya, 127 n. i 
 osadhi-taraka, 40 n. 4 
 
 kamma-, 90 n. 3 
 
 kalyana-, goodness, 30 
 
 kariya, 33 n. 2 
 
 kama-, lust, 68, 69, 100, 109, 112, 113, 
 
 125 n. i ; 127, 128 
 kamakamina-, 39 n. 3 
 kala-vipassi-, 61 n. 2 
 kalena, 61 n. i 
 kukkutasukara, 55 n. 3 
 kusa, the grass, 88 
 
 Eh 
 
 khanda-, attribute, 29, 70, 122 
 khema-, security, 30, 31, 32, 47, 5* 
 
 52, 70, 125 
 khoda-, anger, 23, 27 
 gadh-, 48 n. 3; 112 n. 4 
 gaha-, 78 n. 2 
 gocara-, 114 n. i 
 
 Gfl 
 
 ghateti, 42, n. 4 
 
 C 
 cakkhu-, the Eye, 72 
 
 Ch 
 
 chanda-, yearning, 54 
 
 jagara-, watchfulness, 61 
 jinati, 42 n. 5 
 
 jhana-, 58 n. 3 
 
 N 
 
 fiona-, understanding, 73 
 
 tagara plant, the, 88 
 tacasara-, bamboo, 65 
 tanha-, 29 n. 2 ; 68, 106, 127 
 tad, 56 n. i 
 tadaminSL, 104 n. i 
 
 Th 
 
 thaddha-, 45 n. i 
 thmamiddha-, sloth, 129, 130 
 
 dama-, self-command, 35 
 
 dakkhineyyesu, 39 n. 3 
 
 data-, 85 n. i 
 
 dana-, charity, 3, 35, 38, 39, 7i, 85, 86 
 
 ditthi-, belief, 46, 62 n. 4 ; 63, 79 . 8 ; 
 
 80, 81 
 
 ditthi-tthana-, subjects of belief, 68 
 duccarita-, evil actions, 75, 76 
 dubbhe, 104 n. 5 
 detha, 86 n. 4 
 dosa-, hate, 22, 26, 64, 77, 78, 102, no, 
 
 in 
 dosa-sanniia-, 97 n. i 
 
 Dh 
 
 'dhstu- t element, 56 n. i ; 58, 81, 82, 99 
 
 N 
 
 nikkhitta-, 46 n. 2 
 nicchata-, 66 n. i 
 
PALI INDEX 
 
 141 
 
 nipaka-, 47 n. 3 
 niraggalam, 42 n. i 
 nirasa-, devoid of hope, 68 
 nirupadhi, getting rid of substrata, 65, 
 
 82 
 nirodha-, cessation, 81, 82, 106, 120, 
 
 121, 131 
 
 nirvSna-(nibbana-), 47, 48,49,57^2; 
 
 58, 59, 69, 100, 101, 106, 112, 
 
 121, 132 
 
 nivittha, 96 n. 2 
 nissarana-, deliverance, 81 
 nekkamma-, separation, 81, 101, 107 
 
 paccanubhoti, 57 n. 3 
 
 paja-, 25 n. i ; 28 n. i 
 
 panna-, wisdom, 54, 70, 71, 114 
 
 paticca, 108 n. i 
 
 paticca-samuppanna-, chain of causa- 
 tion, 8 1 
 
 patimukkassa, 77 n. 4 
 
 pabhangunam, 56 n. 2 
 
 pamada-, pleasure, 59 
 
 pamudita-, cheerful, 60 
 
 parinna-, thorough knowledge, 48, 49 
 
 paritta-, 90 n. 2 
 
 pariyaya-, 52 n. 3 
 
 pariyutthita-, 62 n. 3 
 
 paribbaje, 29 n. 4 
 
 pari-vraj-, recluse, 124 
 
 parihana-, decrease, 59 
 
 palasa-puta-, 88 n. 5 
 
 paviveka-, solitude, 51 
 
 pavecchati, 86 n. i 
 
 pahana-, renunciation, 48 
 
 pakata-, 109 n. 4 
 
 patisallana, recluse life, 58, 59 
 
 patimokkha-, the precepts, 113 n. 2; 
 129 
 
 papa-, sin, 53 
 
 payata-pani-, 119 n. 2 
 
 pitaka, basket, i 
 
 pitthito, 109 n. i 
 
 pipasa-, thirst, 106 
 
 punna-, virtue, 34, 36, 41 
 
 punna-kiriya-, virtuous deeds, 71 
 
 praty-anu-bhu-, 35 n. 7 
 
 pretas, the departed spirits, in 
 
 bahuno, 39 n. i 
 
 bahulikata-, 36 n. 2 
 
 bahira-, external, 30 
 
 bodhi-, supreme enlightenment, 94, 95 
 
 brahmacariya-, chastity, 48, 62, 67, 68, 
 
 97, 98, 125 
 brahmacari-, 62 n. i 
 bruheta-, 58 n. 5 
 
 Bh 
 
 bhava-, existence, 54, 63, 68, 69, 70, 81 
 
 bhavana-, devotion, 71, 94, 114, 122 
 
 bhikkhu-, 3, 21 n. 2 
 
 bhikkhuni, a nun, 3, 78 n. i 
 
 bhlyo, 32 n. i 
 
 bhutato, the past, 63 
 
 bhutam, the present, what is, 63 
 
 makkha-, hypocrisy, 23, 28 
 
 manas-, 75 n. 4 
 
 manussata-, humanity, 96 
 
 mana-, pride, 24 
 
 muta-, 131 n. 3 
 
 muttha-sati-, 109 n. 3 
 
 moha-, delusion, 22, 27, 28, 29, 77, 78, 
 
 102, 103, no, in 
 moneyya-, silence, 77 
 muni-, the sage, 67 
 
 yaca-yoga-, 119 n. i 
 yatha bhatam, 32 n. 2 
 yoga-kkhema-, security, 30 n. i ; 31, 
 
 32, 47, 51, 52, 70, 125 
 yoniso, profoundly, 49 n. i 
 
 raga-, passion, 77, 78, 81, 99 no, in 
 rupa-, form, 81, 82 
 
142 
 
 ITI-VUTTAKA 
 
 lapita-lfipana-mattena, 116 n. i 
 labha-, gain, 92 
 
 luddhase, vedic plural, 21 n. 4 
 lobha-, desire, 21, 25, 53, 54, 64, 102 
 
 vacana-, the Word, 53 
 
 vattum, 1 06 n. i 
 
 vatthu-, essential, 71 
 
 vadannu, 84 n. i 
 
 vanatha-, 90 n. i 
 
 vanna-, caste (?), 107 n. i 
 
 vasika-, 107 n. 3 
 
 vicikicchd,-, moroseness, 129, 130 
 
 vijja-, sapience, 99 
 
 vinn&na, intellection, 88 n. 8 ; 1 1 1 
 
 vitakka-, 51 n. 3; 92 n. 2 
 
 vinaya-, discipline, 114 
 
 viparinama-, law of transformation, 88 
 
 vipassana-, 58 n. 4 ; 60 n. i 
 
 vipassin-, (creature of) discernment, 
 
 21 n. 3; 25, 26, 27 
 vimutti-, emancipation, 40, 59, 60, 114, 
 
 122 
 
 vimokkha-, release, 75, 95 
 
 viraga-, serenity, 106, 107 
 
 viveka-, seclusion, 52 
 
 vedana-, feeling, 7, 66 
 
 vedayitani, 57 n. 4 
 
 veyyakaranaya, 100 n. i 
 
 vyapdda-, malevolence, 101, 107, 127, 
 
 128, 129, 130 
 vivattayi, 67 n. i 
 
 samyojana-, fetters, 31, 38, 41, 48, 73, 
 
 92, 121 
 
 samvara-, restraint, 48 
 samvega-, 50 n. 2 
 samvejana-, 50 n. i 
 samsagga-, contact, association, 90 
 samsara-, transmigration, 29, 37 m 
 sakkara-, one's own affairs, 48 n. i ; 
 
 92, 93, 94 
 
 samkhara-, aggregates, 81, 99 
 
 samkhaya-, 75 n. 2 
 
 sangha-, 92 n. 5 
 
 samkiya-, 87 n. i 
 
 sannama-, self-control, 35 
 
 sacchikaroti, 131 n. 2 
 
 sannino, 74 n. 5 
 
 saddhd,-, faith, 96, 106 
 
 santi-, repose, 73, 100, 101, no, 132 
 
 sabba-, the All, 6, 24 
 
 sama-, 79 n. 9 
 
 samacariya-, tranquil behavior, 36, 72 
 
 samatha-, tranquility, 99 
 
 samayatn, 100 n. 4 
 
 samadhi-, contemplation, 70, 71, 94, 
 
 1 06 
 
 samadhigayha-, 36 n. 3 
 samussaya-, a mass, 68 
 sampajana-musavcida-, intentional 
 
 falsehood, 38 
 
 sammaddasa-, proper vision, 81 
 sammapasam, 41 n. 3 
 sayam abhinnaya-, 114 n. 2 
 salla-katta-, 119 
 sallato, from its pang, 66 
 sa-vahana-, 74 n. i 
 sahavasa-, association, 87 
 sahavyatam, 96 n. i 
 sara-, quintessence, 59 
 sikkha-pada-, subjects of study, 114, 
 
 129 
 
 siloka-, reputation, 48, 92 
 sita-, 57 n. 5 
 sila, silavat-, 46, 70, 71, 87, 98, 114, 
 
 129 
 
 sukha-, happiness, 71, 72 
 sukhuma-, subtle, 94 
 sunnagaranam, 59 n. i 
 suppatitthita-, 95 n. 3 
 suppavedite, 96 n. 4 
 su-bhavita-, 71 n. i 
 subhikkhavaca-, 86 n. 2 
 sekkha-, 29 n. 4 ; 30 
 sem-, 75 n. i 
 
 seyyathS, 108 n. 5; 116 n. 2; 125 n. 3 
 socceyya-, 76 n. i 
 
THE COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY PRESS 
 
 COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 
 
 INDO-IRANIAN SERIES 
 
 Edited by A. V. WILLIAMS JACKSON 
 Professor of Indo-Iranian Languages in Columbia University 
 
 Volume i. A Sanskrit Grammar for Beginners. With Graded 
 Exercises, Notes, and Vocabulary. By A. V. WILLIAMS 
 JACKSON. In preparation. 
 
 The aim of this work is a practical one ; it is designed to furnish a book for the 
 study of the classical Sanskrit in American and English colleges and universities. 
 
 Volume 2. Indo-Iranian Phonology, with Special Reference to 
 the Middle and New Indo-Iranian Languages. By Louis H. 
 GRAY, Ph.D., sometime Fellow in Indo-Iranian Languages in 
 Columbia University. New York, 1902. 
 
 Cloth, 8vo, pp. xvii + 264, $2.00. 
 
 A brief statement of the phonetic developments undergone by the principal Indo- 
 Iranian languages from the Sanskrit, Avestan, and Old Persian through the Pali, 
 the Prakrits, and Pahlavi down to the Hindi, Singhalese, New Persian, Afghan, 
 and other Indo-Iranian dialects. Special pains have been taken to make the work 
 as convenient as possible for reference. 
 
 Volume 3. A Bibliography of the Sanskrit Drama, with an In- 
 troductory Sketch of the Dramatic Literature of India. By 
 MONTGOMERY SCHUYLER, JR., A.M., sometime Fellow in Indo- 
 Iranian Languages in Columbia University. New York, 1906. 
 
 Cloth, 8vo, pp. xi + 105, $1.50. 
 
 The design of this bibliography is to give as complete a list as possible of all printed 
 and manuscript Sanskrit plays and of articles and works relating to the Hindu 
 drama. The introduction furnishes a convenient epitome of the whole subject. 
 
 Volume 4. An Index Verborum of the Fragments of the Avesta. 
 By MONTGOMERY SCHUYLER, JR., A.M. New York, 1901. 
 
 Cloth, 8vo, pp. xiv -f 106, $1.50. 
 
 This index collects and cites all examples of each word found in the hitherto dis- 
 covered fragments not included in Geldner's edition of the Avesta. 
 
 Volume 5. Sayings of Buddha : the Iti-vuttaka, a Pali work of 
 
the Buddhist canon, for the first time translated, with introduc- 
 tion and notes. By JUSTIN HARTLEY MOORE, A.M., Ph.D. 
 (Columbia), Instructor in French in the College of the City of 
 New York. New York, 1908. 
 
 Cloth, 8vo, pp. xiii + 142, $1.50. 
 
 This volume presents a Buddhistic work not hitherto accessible in translation. 
 The introduction treats of the composition and general character of the work and 
 the chief features of its style and language. A full index of cardinal words facili- 
 tates cross-reference to the various sections. 
 
 Volume 6. The Nyaishes, or Zoroastrian Litanies. Avestan text 
 with the Pahlavi, Sanskrit, Persian, and Gujarati versions, 
 edited together and translated, with notes. (Khordah Avesta, 
 Part i.) By MANECKJI NUSSERVANJI DHALLA, A.M., Ph.D. 
 New York, 1908. Cloth, 8vo, pp. xxii -f- 235, $2.00. 
 
 The Pahlavi text, here edited and translated for the first time, is the result of a 
 collation of seventeen manuscripts and forms an addition to the existing fund of 
 Pahlavi literature. The introduction gives an account of the MS. material and 
 discusses the relation of the various versions, their characteristics, and their value. 
 
 In addition to the Sanskrit Grammar for Beginners, the follow- 
 ing volumes are also in preparation : 
 
 PriyadarSika, a Hindu Drama ascribed to King Harsha. Trans- 
 lated from the Sanskrit and Prakrit by G. K. NARIMAN and 
 A. V. WILLIAMS JACKSON, with notes and an introduction by 
 the latter. 
 
 This romantic drama on the adventures of a lost princess was supposedly written 
 by Harsha, king of Northern India in the seventh century, and is now to be pub- 
 lished for the first time in English translation. Besides giving an account of the 
 life and times of the author, the introduction will deal also with the literary, lin- 
 guistic, and archaeological aspects of the play. 
 
 Vasavadatta, a Sanskrit Romance by Subandhu. Translated 
 with an introduction and notes by Louis H. GRAY, PH.D. 
 
 This romance is one of the best examples of the artificial and ornate style in 
 Sanskrit prose. Besides the translation, the volume will also contain the trans- 
 literated text of the South Indian ' recension, which differs to a noteworthy degree 
 from that of Hall, and a bibliography. The relation of the Sanskrit romance to 
 the Occidental, especially the Greek, will be discussed in the introduction ; and 
 the notes will include parallels of incident in modern Indian and other folk-tales, 
 as well as points of resemblance with other Sanskrit romances. 
 
 Da&arupa, a treatise on Hindu Dramaturgy by Dhanamjaya. 
 Now first translated, with the text and an introduction and 
 
notes, by GEORGE C. O. HAAS, A.M., sometime Fellow in Indo- 
 Iranian Languages in Columbia University. 
 
 This work, composed at the court of King Munja of Malava in the latter half of 
 the tenth century, is one of the three most important treatises on the canons of 
 dramatic composition in early India, a full discussion of which will be given in the 
 introduction. The notes will contain important matter from the native com- 
 mentary and references to parallel passages in the other treatises on dramatics and 
 rhetoric. 
 
 Yashts, or Hymns of Praise, from the Khordah Avesta. Avestan 
 text with the Pahlavi, Sanskrit, Persian, and Gujarati versions, 
 edited together and translated, with notes, by MANECKJI Nus- 
 SERVANJI DHALLA, A.M., Ph.D. 
 
 This volume is a continuation of the edition of the Khordah Avesta begun with the 
 Nyaishes in volume 6 of the series and will be uniform with that volume in plan 
 and arrangement. 
 
 Tales of the Dead : the Petavatthu, translated from the original 
 Pali, with introduction and notes, by JUSTIN HARTLEY MOORE, 
 A.M., Ph.D. 
 
 The Petavatthu, one of the books of the Buddhist canon, has not hitherto been 
 translated into any Occidental language. It contains material of interest in com- 
 parison with early Christian doctrines concerning hell. Reference will be made in 
 the notes to the native commentary of Dhammapala. 
 
 The following volume, not in the Indo-Iranian series, is also 
 published by the Columbia University Press : 
 
 Zoroaster, the Prophet of Ancient Iran. By A. V. WILLIAMS 
 JACKSON. New York, 1899. 
 
 Cloth, 8vo, pp. xxiii -f 314, $3.00. 
 
 This work aims to collect in one volume all that is known about the great Iranian 
 prophet. The story of the life and ministry of Zoroaster is told in twelve chapters, 
 and these are followed by appendixes on explanations of Zoroaster's name, the 
 date of the Prophet, Zoroastrian chronology, Zoroaster's native place and the scene 
 of his ministry, and classical and other passages mentioning his name. A map and 
 three illustrations accompany the volume. 
 
 THE COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY PRESS 
 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY, Agents 
 64-66 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK 
 
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS 
 
 WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 
 THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY 
 WILL INCREASE TO SO CENTS ON THE FOURTH 
 DAY AND TO $1.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY 
 OVERDUE. 
 
 13 
 
 NOV1TSS40NI 
 
 N 101947 
 
 LOAN 
 
 MAR 
 
 tTT* 
 
 JUN 1 
 
 
 RECEIVE 
 
 LOAN Di 
 
 LD21-100m-7,'33 
 
5 
 
 182318